JP2019025095A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a problem which a player gets tired of the game at an early stage.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: second privilege imparting means capable of imparting a second privilege which is advantageous to a player when second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a specific second determination result in display means; and game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than in the first game state. The game state setting means, when the second game state is set, on the basis of imparting of the first privilege, sets the first game state and switches the game state from the second game state to the first game state to set on the basis of the fact that the number of determination times by the first determination means or the second determination means reaches the number of termination, thereby suppressing a problem which a player gets tired of the game at an early stage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is successful. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. The game was improved by providing the player with the game.

JP 2006-000392 A

  However, the lottery game executed when the game ball is won at the start winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game at an early stage. There was a problem.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing a first determination, and a first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. First dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first dynamic display period, and a first dynamic display period capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means A first privilege that can give a first benefit that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the specific first determination result on the determining means and the display means. A second determination unit capable of dynamically displaying on the display unit the second determination unit capable of executing the second determination and the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination unit; Display means and the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means A second dynamic display period determining unit capable of determining a second dynamic display period; and when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a specific second determination result on the display unit, A gaming state in which a second privilege giving means capable of giving a second privilege advantageous to the player, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player over the first gaming state can be set Setting means, and when the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the provision of the first privilege. The switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the number of times of determination by the first determining means or the second determining means is the number of times of completion.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the gaming state setting means is configured to store the first identification information based on the specific first determination result when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the execution of the dynamic display, the second gaming state is set, and after the dynamic display of the first identification information is completed, the first gaming state can be set.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is based on the establishment of the first condition in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2 during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. And having a first control means capable of executing a first control forcing the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information being dynamically displayed to be other than the specific first determination result. It is.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed as the first condition. The second privilege is granted on the condition that the second privilege is granted.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the display unit dynamically displays the first determination unit capable of executing the first determination and the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination unit. First dynamic display means capable of, first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, A first privilege granting means capable of giving a first privilege advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the specific first determination result on a display means; A second determination unit capable of performing two determinations, a second dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying on the display unit second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination unit, Second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means When the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a specific second determination result on the display means, the second dynamic display period determining means that can be determined is advantageous to the player. A second privilege granting means capable of granting two benefits; a game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; The gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the provision of the first privilege when the second gaming state is set, and the first determination means or Based on the fact that the number of times of determination by the second determination means is the number of times of end, the second game state is switched to the first game state and set.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on execution of dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the first gaming state can be set after the dynamic display of the first identification information is completed.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the first identification information corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is established based on the establishment of the first condition. It has a 1st control means which can perform the 1st control which makes a 1st judgment result other than the above-mentioned specific 1st judgment result compulsorily.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines according to the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first condition can be satisfied on the condition that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It is configured.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation can be raised for the establishment of the first condition and the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed with a display apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when only special figure 1 has a holding ball at the time of jackpot ending displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the dash mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1 embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of completion | finish of dash mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in the case where the after-hit end-latency state is set, and (c) is a third symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production | presentation when the latent state after jackpot display displayed with an apparatus is set and there are 1-4 special figure 1 reservation ball numbers. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number table set to ROM of (2), (c) is the content of the second random number table set to ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal jackpot type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability variation jackpot type selection table set in ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the main control in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table set to ROM of the apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability change set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latent probabilities set to (2). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the common figure fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 temporary stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 cancellation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the number-of-pending balls processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the decision related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the restart process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the variable stop command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the alerting command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending screen of the jackpot game displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol display in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the content of the display screen in the probability change state displayed with an apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content after the fluctuation | variation start per special figure 1 (non special figure 2 fluctuation | variation) displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b), It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of special figure 2 small hits during RUSH displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content after the fluctuation | variation start per special figure 1 (during special figure 2 fluctuation | variation) displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b), It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation stops during the fluctuation per special figure 1 displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot special selection 2 table for probability variation latent probability set in ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability change set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number 3 table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number 3 table set to ROM of this. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 3 table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the main control in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the common figure fluctuation pattern 3 table set to ROM of the apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the transfer destination selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the transfer destination selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the transfer 1 table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the transfer 2 table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 88, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entrances 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640 and the like through which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 or a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a is a front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like that guides the motor is attached. The contents of a large number of entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Ball opening 63, upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2, second entrance 640, left variable prize device 65, right variable prize device 650, normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, variable The display device unit 80 and the like are assembled and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed through the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered with the back surface (surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of transparent resin (for example, ABS). The fired ball is configured not to collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured such that the ball enters (wins) the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, or the second entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether or not it has entered the ball (winning). Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, the first symbol display device 37a operates, However, when entering (winning) the second entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate. That is, the 1st symbol display apparatus 37a shows the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) performed when a ball | bowl enters into the upper 1st entrance 64b1 or the lower 1st entrance 64b2. The first symbol display device 37b is a display means for indicating a lottery result of a lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. .

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate which of the gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (probability change state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.) is indicated by the lighting state, or the first symbol changes. It is indicated by whether it is in the middle (dynamic display for stopping the combination of symbols for displaying the lottery result), or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol that is out of sight is indicated by a lighting state, the number of held balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds or a error that is a big hit is displayed by a 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by the combination of the emission colors. In the present embodiment, the various game states are notified by the combination of the light emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). However, any configuration can be used as long as the player can identify the various game states. For example, you may comprise so that various game states may be alert | reported by changing the length (flashing aspect) of the period when the light emission means is lighted, and the light extinction period.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is triggered when a ball enters (wins) the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640. Is done. Then, in the special symbol lottery, whether or not the jackpot is won is determined (hit lottery). Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game that is in a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, an open state in which a ball can be easily won in the specific winning port 65a of the left variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is opened, and each winning port is opened. By winning the ball, a game that allows a lot of winning balls to be acquired in a short period of time is executed. During the jackpot game, a special symbol lottery result is displayed after being stopped (determined), and is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) of an opening period (a specific prize opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 or , A period in which a closed state in which a ball is difficult to enter the V prize opening 650a of the right variable prize winning device 650 is set), a round game period in which an open state is set, and after one round game period has ended, A predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the start of the round game, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended A jackpot game period consisting of an ending period in which the state is set and a period is set.

  In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (determined display), the opening period is set, so that each winning mouth in the jackpot game is opened at the timing when the winning prize is opened. Since it is possible to prepare for launching in any direction, the big hit game can be performed smoothly. Moreover, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, an easily understandable game can be provided.

  In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the last round game is completed. Since it is possible to prepare for launching a ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is also determined. Although detailed explanation will be given later, the jackpot type to be judged is that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, the special symbol high probability state after the jackpot ends, the low probability of the normal symbol is granted 16R latent probability big hit, jackpot The number of game rounds is 2 rounds and the special symbol has a high probability state after the jackpot ends, the normal symbol has a low probability of 2R latent chance, the jackpot game round number is 2 rounds and the special symbol has a high probability state after the jackpot ends , 2R probability variation jackpots that are given a low probability state of ordinary symbols are prepared.

  Further, in a part of the case where it is determined that the winning is not a jackpot as the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the privilege given to the player is less than that of the jackpot described above (for example, the right variable winning device 650 is used only for one round). Bonus to be released) Bonus is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big win (whether or not a big hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, A symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

  In the present embodiment, one of a “normal state”, a “latent probability state”, and a “probability change state” is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 14). The normal state is a gaming state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/229) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, a special symbol: a low probability state, Normal symbol: referred to as low probability state), and in the latent state, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to high probability (1/120), and the normal symbol hit probability is set to low probability (11/233) Game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), probability variation state, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to high probability (1/120), the normal symbol hit A gaming state in which the probability is set to a high probability (232/233) (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state, a normal symbol: a high probability state).

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, even if a special symbol jackpot is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set when the jackpot is won Accordingly, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is made different. Thereby, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol, the game can be performed while making the player aware of the set gaming state.

  Here, “16R latent promising big hit” is a high probability state with a special symbol after a big hit game with 16 maximum rounds (a big win game that opens the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 for 16 rounds). This is a jackpot that can be transferred, and if a low probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game, a latent state is set as a gaming state after the jackpot game. Note that the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game in the case of winning the “16R latent chance big hit” is variably set according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won as described above.

  Here, “2R latent promising big hit” means that the maximum number of rounds is a big win game (a big win game that opens the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 for two rounds) to a high probability state of a special symbol. This is a jackpot that can be transferred, and if a low probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game, a latent state is set as a gaming state after the jackpot game.

  “2R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot game with a maximum of 2 rounds (the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for two rounds, and after the jackpot game, a high probability of a normal symbol, a special symbol high probability state) Is set and probability change is set as the gaming state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when a jackpot game corresponding to “16R latent chance big hit” is executed, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is operated for a predetermined period (30 seconds or 10 balls). The game that is released (round game) is executed a predetermined number of times (16 times), so that a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right variable winning device 650) during the jackpot game As a result, the ball that has won the right variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot game corresponding to the “2R probability variable jackpot”, the jackpot game in which the opening operation of the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is more limited than the jackpot game corresponding to the “16R latent probability jackpot” described above is executed. Is done. Specifically, a game in which the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is released for a short period (0.5 seconds) during a single jackpot game (round game) is executed only twice. Executed.

  Returning to FIG. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a general entrance 63 is provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are triggered by the entrance (start winning) to the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640. To a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the variation of the third symbol in synchronization with the variation display in FIG. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of the ball as a trigger. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b in accordance with the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “○” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Fluctuation display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is It is comprised so that it may be in an operation state (open state) only for the predetermined time.

  As a process for determining whether an illegal game (right-handed game in a normal state) is being performed and notifying the abnormality, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (two or more) due to the right-handed game. It is good to comprise so that abnormality notification may be performed when it is discriminate | determined that it became. Therefore, you may comprise so that abnormality notification may be performed when a ball | bowl entered into the 2nd entrance 640. As a result, it is possible to suppress a small amount (one shot) of a ball that has been launched due to a player's operation error from entering the right side region and executing abnormality notification.

  It should be noted that during normal symbol high-probability state (high-probability high), the probability of hitting is increased, and the time required to open the electric accessory 64a per hit and the number of times of opening are increased. If the ball is likely to enter the lower first entrance 64b2 during the certain period, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state during normal accuracy, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right of the game board. (About 50%) is configured to be able to pass. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed on the second symbol retaining lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls to be held for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but is set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). You may do it. Further, the number of normal symbol start ports (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol hold lamp may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, an upper first entrance 64b1 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. Furthermore, when a ball enters the first entrance 64b1, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the first entrance switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

  Below the upper first entrance 64b1, a lower first entrance 64b2 into which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) makes a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

  On the right side of the lower first entrance 64b2 and in the right side area of the game board 13 (lower area of the flow path unit 3660), a second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed. . When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. A general entrance 63 is disposed in the left area of the game board.

  When a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second entrance 640, It is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. In addition, when a ball enters the general entrance 63, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the number of balls increases because the ball only wins the second entrance 640 where one winning ball is set. There is nothing to do.

  Further, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is executed. In the present embodiment, the lottery executed in the normal state is executed. A long time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern (variation time) is set as the variation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of two special symbols (special drawing 2). Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In other words, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the left-handed game (the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is executed by causing the ball to flow down to the left region of the gaming board 13). In addition, it is a game advantageous to the player to perform a game for entering a ball into the upper first entrance 64b1.

  In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, and the case where the ball wins the second entrance 640. The number of prize balls to be paid out is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out and the second pitch when the balls are awarded to the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the mouth 640 is the same as the number of prize balls to be paid out, for example, the prize ball to be paid out when the ball wins the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. The number may be configured as one.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the lower first entrance 64b2 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 64a is configured in one blade shape, and a closed state (see FIG. 2) that restricts the ball from entering the lower first entrance 64b2, and the sphere is the lower first entrance. It is controlled variably in an open state (see FIG. 3) that allows entry into the ball 64b2.

  The electric accessory 64a is normally located in a closed state, and is configured so that a ball cannot enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Then, based on the fact that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is won, the ball is variably moved to the open state for a predetermined period so that the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance 64b2. It is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating a driving tool for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the player operates the frame button 22, a command for driving an accessory is sent to the other device 228 in order to drive an effect for an effect (not shown), or the operation content to the frame button 22 is handled. An audio output command for causing the audio output device 226 to output audio is set, or a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content to the frame button 22 is set. You may comprise.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 5A and 5B are schematic views schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5A). The third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) Each pattern is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating numbers “0” to “9”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed using different types of characters (animals, etc.) for each piece of identification information that imitates numbers. Thus, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that an easy-to-understand game can be performed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform variable display.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured such that symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol row L3 is configured such that the symbol row is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and scrolled from right to left to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub-symbol (blank symbol) that does not indicate the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the oblique direction. In the state in which each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together with the jackpot symbol combination (the same main symbol combination in the first embodiment) on the active line. In this case, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in the first embodiment, each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3. Until all the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, the number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol sequence, and each symbol The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 3rd symbol's variable display area is displayed. It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the third symbol is changing by reducing the size or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the corner of the display screen). You may make it do. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the same as the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol (the degree to which the player is difficult to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be varied so as to correspond to the changing type of the special symbol.

  Next, contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm in front view. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas for displaying identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is being changed (and changing) and the lottery result). The 4th symbol (Special Fig. 4 Fig. 4) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) The 4th symbol (special figure 2 4th symbol) in order to indicate is displayed in small display field Dm2.

  By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display form using numerals, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variably displayed manner in the small display areas Dm1, Dm2. (See FIG. 6 (a)), showing the situation where the special symbol is changing, and by stopping and displaying the 4th symbol in the small display areas Dm1, Dm2 (see FIG. 6 (a)), the special symbol lottery Although it is configured to show the result, without being limited thereto, for example, a display mode that imitates a graphic as the fourth pattern, a display mode that deforms a graphic using a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, A special symbol may be changed depending on a display mode in which the color is changed, and a special symbol lottery result may be displayed by stopping display of a specific symbol or color.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the 4th symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being changed (and changing) and the lottery result), but this is not the only case. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changed). In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) on which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is the main display. Although the example formed in the upper right side of the area | region Dm is shown, the position and magnitude | size in which this 4th symbol display area is formed are according to the production | presentation aspect of the change production performed in the center part of the main display area Dm. May be different.

  By comprising in this way, the area | region where a variation effect is performed is restrict | limited by the 4th symbol display area, and it can suppress that a production effect falls. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It may be configured to execute.

  A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction of launching the ball (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 6A).

  In the present embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guidance display area. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a “right-handed” display mode for guiding the player to perform the right-handed game and a left-handed game for the player are performed. The display mode of “left-handed” for guiding this is configured to be displayed, and the display mode of “right-handed” is a gaming state in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, Displayed in the latent state and during a specific jackpot game (during a jackpot game in which the right variable winning device 650 is opened), the display mode of “left-handed” is a predetermined period after the right-handed game ends (for example, 10 seconds). In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed in a game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state or a probability change state, “ The “left-handed” display mode is configured to be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5B, the description will be continued. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which the number-of-holds display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed. The small display area Dm1a includes the number of reserved balls (holding) of the first special symbol. Special figure 1 hold information for indicating the number of stored) is displayed, and special figure 2 hold information for indicating the number of reserved balls (the number of stored memories) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6A, the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a have previously stored winning information in addition to a value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol. It is configured to display a display mode in which the determined result (prefetching result) can be suggested to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting a game to be executed in the future (a special symbol lottery result stored on hold).

  Further, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 6A, the sub display area Ds is configured to display a comment on the game content being executed. By comprising in this way, the game which is easy to understand for a player can be provided. The sub display area Ds may be used for other purposes. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 is displayed in the sub display area Ds. It may be configured.

  In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a holding display mode (for example, a holding symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub display area Ds. And it is good to comprise so that a player can grasp | ascertain the number of hold balls of the present special symbol by the display number of a hold display mode. Further, it is preferable that the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold is determined in advance, and the corresponding hold display mode is varied based on the determination result.

  By configuring in this way, a game is played while expecting to win a big win in a lottery of a special symbol corresponding to a reserved symbol whose display mode is changed among a plurality of reserved symbols that may exist. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the holding symbol corresponding to the number of each holding memory, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of holding symbols. As a result, it is possible to set a result display for easily displaying the reserved symbol display changed to.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to this, a game result suggesting mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are displayed. An effect explanation mode for explanation, a frame button related display mode for indicating the timing and result of operating the frame button 22, and a hit related information display mode for displaying information on the jackpot game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. In this state, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, or the second entrance 640. Continue until balled. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Despite the player firing the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), any one of the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640 However, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 This is due to the fact that no games are played.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, a new ball enters any of the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640. In this case, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is executed.

  Next, the content of the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIGS. The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters (start winning prize) into the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, or the second entrance 640, the first special symbol display device 37 uses it as a trigger. Variation display of the symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and it is easy to draw (fluctuate) each special symbol according to the set gaming state. Are configured differently. Then, a lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the gaming state in which the third symbol to be subjected to the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may become the 3rd symbol corresponding to the special symbol which is easy to be done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute a variation effect using the third symbol regardless of the gaming state being set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  First, referring to FIGS. 7B and 7C, the game in the case where a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game of the present embodiment is finished. The flow will be described. In the present embodiment, different gaming states are set after the jackpot is ended according to the jackpot type. When the latent probability state after the big hit is set, the special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is set to be advantageous to the player. In the special figure 2 game, it is set to win the jackpot D that is most advantageous to the player and the jackpot D that is most advantageous to the player so as to be advantageous to the player.

  However, in this embodiment, it is a simultaneous change type gaming machine, and special figure 1 fluctuates when there is a entrance to upper 1 entrance 64b1 or lower 1 entrance 64b2 during special figure 2 game. However, there is a risk of providing a game that would win a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player and give distrust to the player. In order to eliminate the game, in the present embodiment, when winning a small win in the special figure 2 lottery, if winning a big win in the special figure 1, the lottery result (fluctuation result) is out of place and forced stop or temporary stop Configure to be In the game where the latent state is displayed after the big hit, if there is a holding ball in the special figure 1, the right-handed game is immediately executed, and the ball is entered into the second entrance 640 to make a small hit. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect prompting the player to win.

  First, with reference to FIG. 7 (b), description will be given of the flow of display of effects when there is no special figure 1 holding ball at the time of ED in the jackpot that shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends. When there is no special figure 1 holding ball at the jackpot ending (ED) (see FIG. 7 (b) A), the super mode ED effect corresponding to the latent state is executed as the display content, and at the end of the ED (FIG. 7). (B) (see B), when there is no special figure 1 holding ball, the effect of the super mode (the mode corresponding to the latent state) is displayed.

  On the other hand, if there is a special figure 1 holding ball at the time of the big hit ED, the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the dash mode is displayed to prompt the player to execute the right-handed game immediately. It is composed. FIG.7 (c) is the figure which showed the flow of the production | presentation in the case of the jackpot which shifts to the latent state after the jackpot end, and there are 1-4 special figure 1 reserved balls at the time of jackpot ED. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), when there is a number of reserved balls at the time of jackpot ending (see FIG. 7 (c) A), an ending for dash is displayed.

  Specifically, a description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of reserved balls is only in the special figure 1 at the time of the jackpot ending. In the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a rabbit character 811 and a turtle character 814 are displayed, and an easy-to-understand effect is provided to the player using this character. The character 811 is configured not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in a period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A gaming state that is advantageous to the game state (a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state). With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen. Can be provided.

  When only the special figure 1 has a holding ball at the time of the jackpot ending, a guidance display mode of “right-handed” is displayed in the display area Dm3, and “a right-handed game” is promoted in the sub-display area Ds. Hurry up and hit right to finish before the turtle! ”Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player that there is a need to hurry to make a right turn. In addition, in the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e, display modes that suggest the remaining special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of digestions are displayed. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 0, Dm4a is displayed; when the number of reserved balls is 1, Dm4a to Dm4b are stored; when the number of stored balls is 2, Dm4a to Dm4c are stored; In the case of 3, Dm4a to Dm4d are lit up and in the case where the number of reserved balls is 4, Dm4a to Dm4e are lit up. Then, “GOAL” is displayed in the small display area 0, and it is possible to easily inform the player that the mode is aimed at reducing the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 to 0.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the ending for the dash mode is displayed when there is a special figure 1 reserved ball number at the time of the jackpot ending (see FIGS. 7C and 7A), but the ED ends and the state shifts to the latent state In the case where there is a special figure 1 holding ball (see FIGS. 7C and 7B), a dash mode is displayed as an effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6B, a display screen in the dash mode that is displayed when the latent state is in a state where there is a special figure 1 reserved ball number will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the dash mode. In the present embodiment, during the latent state, it is advantageous for the player to enter the second entrance 640 by a right-handed game and to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Has been. Then, if the big win or the small win is won by the second special symbol, the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol can be temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by the removal. Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent game, 1/2 is configured to win a small hit, and the first special symbol is more than the second special symbol when the variation time is also in the latent state. Since a long variation time is set, the possibility of winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player with the first special symbol during the variation of the second special symbol is very rare.

  However, if the player does not execute the right-handed game when there is only the number of balls held in the first special symbol after the transition to the latent state, if the player does not execute the right-handed game, the winning time will be a win that is disadvantageous to the player after the change time of the first special symbol has elapsed. There was a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol after the big hit, the dash mode for causing the player to quickly execute the right-handed game is not the super mode displayed during the latent state. Is displayed and an effect for digesting the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed.

  In FIG. 7B, a state in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit and a character 814 imitating a turtle are competing for GOAL 812 in the center of the main display area Dm is displayed in the center of the display screen. Will display the comment “Hurry and make a right turn!”. In addition, a “right-handed” guidance display mode is also displayed in the small display area Dm3. In this way, by displaying the display mode for guiding the right handing in both the sub display area Ds and the small display area Dm3, it is possible to emphasize the right handed game with emphasis by the player. Further, by varying the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the appropriate gaming method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continue to execute the disadvantaged game. Can be suppressed.

  The small display area Dm1 and the small display area Dm2 indicate that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the small display area Dm2a has the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. The state where two are acquired is displayed. The small display area Dm1a displays that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one. Therefore, as described above, the small display areas Dm4a to Dm4b are lit to indicate that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1.

  Returning to FIG. The dash mode ends when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes zero, and switches to the super mode effect corresponding to the latent state.

  Here, with reference to Fig.7 (a), the display screen which shows completion | finish of dash mode is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the big win or the small win is won by the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by the off symbol, and the dash mode is In the super mode to indicate to the player that the game is in the latent state by winning the small hits with the second special symbol during the latent state, and when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol becomes 0 It becomes a display mode.

  In the center of the main display area Dm, a state in which a character 811 that imitates a rabbit competing in the dash mode passes through GOAL 812 before a character 814 that imitates a turtle is displayed. Then, a comment “GOAL !!” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to inform the player that the dash mode has ended in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode “246” indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit in the small display area Dm2, and at the same time, the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The 4th symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode “357” indicating that the lottery result is off. Further, the upper display area Dm4a is lit and displayed to inform the player that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been lost, and the dash mode is terminated.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when winning a small hit with the second special symbol, it is configured to deviate as it is to Dm1 that displays the variation result of the first special symbol, and the symbol is forcibly stopped. If it is determined that the winning change is a big win, when the forced stop is performed with a losing symbol, the stop display mode or the color of the number of winning balls due to the small win may be displayed in a variable manner. By configuring in this way, the player can obtain a sense of security that it was possible to prevent winning a disadvantageous jackpot. Further, when the pre-reading result is a big hit, the color of the variable display may be changed and displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player, and to further enhance the effect.

<About the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the first embodiment, the gaming state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability of a normal symbol). (Probability state), latency state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and three gaming states can be set, the type of winning jackpot and the game at the time of winning the jackpot A predetermined gaming state is set according to the state (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

  First, the case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which processing is performed when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 9) is operated in the initial state (start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51)). ), The normal state is set as the gaming state.

  In this normal state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special chart 1), if the jackpot A (71% of the jackpot win) is set as the jackpot type, it will again be played after the jackpot game ends. A normal state is set, a jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, and a probable change state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. The jackpot B (25% of the jackpot winning) and the jackpot C (4% of the jackpot winning) are configured such that a latent state (super mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, in the normal state, when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (Special figure 2), the big hit D is set as the big hit type (100% of the big hit win), and after the big hit game ends The certain state (super mode) is set.

  In other words, in the normal state, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, you will enter the challenge mode with a probability of 71%, enter the super mode with a probability of 29%, and you win the jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery Is configured such that the probability variation state is set with a probability of 100%.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the game contents during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game executed during the jackpot game is improved. Can do.

  Next, the flow of the game state transition when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In this embodiment, while the probability variation state is set, the left-handed game is executed and the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed. And, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of Figure 1 during the probability change state, if the jackpot A (60% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the probability change state (challenge mode) after the jackpot game ends ) Is set to loop. Further, when the big hit B (25% of the big hit win) and the big hit C (15% of the big hit win) are set, a latent state (super mode) is set.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the special figure 2 hold stored on hold when the probability change state is set as the gaming state, the big hit type D (big hit) 100% of winning) is set. The probability variation state is set again after the end of the jackpot game.

  In other words, if the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the probability variation state, the probability variation state (challenge mode) is set to loop with a probability of 60%, and the latent probability state (super mode) is set with a probability of 40%. Is done. And when winning a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 100%.

  Finally, the flow of the game state transition in the state where the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the latent probability state is set, a game in which the lottery in FIG. 2 is mainly executed by a right-handed game is performed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery shown in FIG. 2, if the jackpot D (100% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the latent state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, when the big win is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, if the big hit A (60% of the big hit win) is set as the big hit type, the big hit When the probability change state is set after the game ends and the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot winning) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot winning) are set, the latent state (super mode) is again set after the jackpot game ends. Is set.

  In other words, if the big win is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a probability of 40%, and the probability variation state is set with a probability of 60%. If the big win is won, the latent state (super mode) is looped with a probability of 100%.

  Therefore, the present embodiment is configured such that in the state in which the latent state is set, the latent state, which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player when the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed, can be reliably looped. Therefore, special figure 2 is a special symbol for executing a lottery advantageous to the player rather than special figure 1.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that when the number of jackpots reaches three, the normal state is always set after the third jackpot game ends. Therefore, when winning the jackpot type that shifts to the latent state at the first jackpot, the special jackpot game that wins the jackpot D that is most advantageous to the player can always be executed twice.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a game state other than the latent state is set, that is, to execute the lottery in FIG. 1 is defined as an appropriate game method. If a special figure 2 game is executed during a game state in which a player wins a jackpot, a latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set, and an excessive privilege may be given to the player. There is.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, a long time (10 minutes) of variation time is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being frequently executed during the normal state, so that an excessive privilege (a privilege for setting an advantageous gaming state) is given to the player in the normal state. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if a game (right-handed game) different from the appropriate game (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, and the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the player It can be suppressed that an excessive privilege (privilege for setting an advantageous gaming state) is given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a higher probability than the state in which the normal state is set, and a ball is placed in the second entrance 640. The special drawing 2 lottery is configured to be difficult to execute by making it difficult to enter the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the probability variation state is set, the normal state is set more than the set state. The special symbol jackpot probability is set to a high probability, and the new special figure 2 lottery is more easily executed (the special figure 2 lottery is more easily executed than the special figure 1 lottery). It may be configured to set the variation time or the variation time of the special symbol. Specifically, the state in which the probability variation state is set is greater in the second special symbol than the state in which the normal state is set. To shorten the time set as the variable time (for example, , It may be 3 minutes) configuration.

  With this configuration, when the probability variation state is set, a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is performed with the aim of shifting to the latent probability state which is the most advantageous game state for the player. (Left-handed game) and the second special symbol (special figure) aiming to see various fluctuating effects (bonus effects) by executing a lot of special symbol lotteries, although there is no transition to the latent state The player can select the game (right-handed game) in which the lottery of 2) is performed.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first hit type counter C2 used for the special symbol, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the stop type of the special symbol, and the small hit used for selecting the special symbol small hit type A hit type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  The random symbol lottery C2 is used for the normal symbol lottery, the initial value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area corresponding to an entry to the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 including four reserve areas (holding first to fourth areas). 203a and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entrance to the second entrance 640 composed of four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), In one special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop according to the timing of entering the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2. Each value of the type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. The special symbol variation based on the stored values is started.

  Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the holding first area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. The special symbol variation based on the stored values is started.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). Each of the reserved ball storage areas (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) has an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be executed promptly.

  In the present embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as the lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. For example, it is configured to have a small hit as the lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. It may be configured.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as the lottery result, The value of the type counter C5 may be stored. In this way, regardless of the special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not a small hit is made), the starting opening (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2, second entrance) that triggers the special symbol lottery All the counter values acquired by entering the ball into the mouth 640) are stored, and when the special symbol start condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is necessary among the acquired counter values. By configuring the special symbol lottery using only the value, the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different special symbol lottery specifications (presence / absence of small hits). Therefore, it is possible to share parts and technology, and to reduce costs.

  Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol corresponding to the entry (passage of the sphere) to the through gate 67 including the four reserved areas (the first to fourth areas) is stored in the RAM 203 as described above. A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the values of the second per-random number counter C4 and the general map variation type counter CS2 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

  Then, when the normal symbol start condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area and stored. Normal symbol variation based on the value is started.

  In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the entrance to the second entrance 640 is stored and stored, and each counter acquired based on the passage of the through gate 67 Although it has a configuration for storing and storing the value, it is not limited to this, and a function (holding storage function) for storing each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is not provided. You may comprise as follows.

  By configuring in this way, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous lottery are switched as a special symbol type lottery according to a set gaming state. Thus, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a different lottery state is set in a state where a lot of reserved memory of one special symbol is acquired and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be big hits in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are defined.

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, a determination value determined to be a big hit is defined in common for the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol A predetermined range of determination values is defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 11A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, “7 to 8” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are defined as determination values other than big hits (that is, small hits or misses).

  In addition, when a high probability state (probability variation state, latent state) of a special symbol is set, “0-3” of the values of the first random number counter C1 are defined as the jackpot determination value, A value other than the jackpot is defined as a judgment value other than the jackpot (that is, the jackpot or miss). In other words, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/258 (1/227), and the high probability state of the special symbol is When set, it is prescribed that a jackpot is won with a probability of 4/458 (1/109). Therefore, a gaming state in which a high probability state is more likely to win a jackpot than a low probability state of a special symbol is achieved.

  In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same probability in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Depending on the type of symbol, the jackpot probability may be different. For example, the second special symbol may be configured to have a lower jackpot probability than the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpot probabilities, a high probability state and a low probability state, are prepared, but may be one type or three or more types. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol, Simply, three or more special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state can be set, and different jackpot probabilities may be set for each state.

  Further, the value of the first random number counter C1 is also referred to when determining whether or not the special symbol lottery result has been won. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is the small hit random number table 202b. If the value matches a random number value that is a small hit defined in the above, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

  Here, the small random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number table 202b. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be small hits in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are defined.

  Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, a determination value determined as small hit is defined for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol state (low) Regardless of the probability state and the high probability state), a predetermined range of determination values is defined. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not defined, and the first special symbol is selected by lottery. It is stipulated not to win.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is specified in the range of “112 to 342”. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (not winning), and the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 224/458 (about 1/2 .1).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the first per-random number counter C1 value won for the big hit is different from the first per-random number counter C1 value won for the small hit. It is configured, and in a single process (a process for determining whether or not a winning) a special symbol lottery is executed, the jackpot winning determination and the small winning determination are continuously (simultaneously) executed. doing.

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute a lottery for big or small hits with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are defined differently according to the probability of winning a small hit. By comprising in this way, the privilege given to a player can differ by lottery of the 1st special symbol and lottery of the 2nd special symbol. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to execute more lots of special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (latency probability state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed. On the other hand, it is possible to play the game eagerly so that a specific game state is set.

  In the present embodiment, a table (first random number table 202a) referred to when the big hit lottery is executed and a table (small hit random number table 202b) referred to when the small lottery is executed. Although it comprises separately, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise so that a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery may be performed using one table. In this case, for example, the first hit random number table 202a may be configured to define the range of the counter value to be won by the small win for each special symbol type. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is determined according to the predetermined determination value according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. Although it is configured to perform the determination of winning or small win, but not limited to this, for example, depending on the number of big wins or small wins within a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied, The first winning random number counter C1 value defined as a big win or a small win may be varied, or a big win lottery or a small win executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. A data table in which a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot or a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is not defined as an abnormal data table to be referred to in the lottery It may be provided.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and both special symbols can be executed. However, there is a restriction (so that the jackpot game is not executed) so that they will not win the jackpot at the same time (in parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a restriction, for example, during the period until a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed in the lottery of one special symbol, the other special symbol is drawn. In order not to win a big jackpot, do not specify a judgment value corresponding to a big jackpot, and execute a special symbol lottery with reference to a dedicated data table that specifies only a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot It may be configured.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. At this timing, the data is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection table 202d using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

  Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. In the jackpot type selection table 202d, as described above, a random value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is defined using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 that determines the jackpot type in the normal state, and a probability change / latency table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the probability variation state or the latent state. Is included at least.

  First, with reference to FIG. 13, it is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed | regulated to table 202d1 for normal use. The normal table 202d1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. As shown in FIG. 13, the normal table 202d1 includes a plurality of special symbol types (special diagrams 1 and 2) that are won in the jackpot in association with the acquired value of the first per-spec counter C2. Jackpot type is defined.

  Specifically, a special jackpot A is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 70”. In the range from “71 to 95”, “big hit B” is defined, and in the range from “96 to 99”, “big hit C” is defined. In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of “0 to 99”.

  Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, a plurality of movable members (open / close door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 and the left variable winning game) executed during the jackpot game. The operation contents (timing, number of times) of the device 65 with respect to the opening / closing door 65f1 and the switching member 650h) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an opening operation scenario that defines the time series.

  Then, the release operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in a running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the ongoing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

  In this way, the operation content of each movable member during the big hit game in which a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, opening / closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65, and switching member 650h) is moved is sometimes described. By using the open operation scenario defined in the series, operation control for a plurality of movable members can be centrally managed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to appropriately set the operation timing of each movable member as compared to the case where the operation control is separately performed on each movable member, and other cases when a failure occurs in one movable member. The operation process for the movable member can be executed smoothly.

  “Big jackpot A” is a jackpot of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (number of round games executed) is 2 rounds and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for 2 rounds. A jackpot type in which the game is executed. With this round game 1, the first attacker (left variable prize winning device) 65 is continuously released until 10 balls are won or the opening period has passed 30 seconds as one round game. It is a round game to be played.

  When “hit A” is set as the jackpot type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (the hourly flag 203m is set to ON), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set ( The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON). In other words, after the jackpot game based on the “jackpot A” is executed, the probability variation state is set.

  “Big Bonus B” has 16 rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a jackpot game, and during the 16 rounds, a jackpot game that opens the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 is executed. .

  In addition, when a jackpot game based on “big jackpot B” is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the hourly flag 203m is set to OFF) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. (The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON). That is, after the big hit game based on “big hit B” is executed, the latent state is set. In the latent state, as will be described in detail later, when the special figure 2 game is executed and the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won, the “jackpot D” that is most advantageous to the player is selected with a probability of 100% Therefore, after the jackpot game is over, the “jackpot B” in which the latent state is set becomes a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the “jackpot A”.

  “Big jackpot C” is a jackpot game of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (number of times round game is executed) is round and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds. Is a jackpot type that is executed.

  In addition, when a jackpot game based on the “jackpot C” is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (the hourly flag 203m is set to OFF), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. (The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON). That is, after the big hit game based on “big hit C” is executed, the latent state is set. Therefore, the game is a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player as compared to the “jackpot A”, and since the number of rounds is small, the game is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player when compared with the “jackpot B”.

  In other words, if a big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the normal state is set as the gaming state, a big hit game ("big hit A") that is disadvantageous to the player is won with a probability of 71%, It is configured to win a jackpot game ("jackpot B" or "jackpot C") disadvantageous to the player with a probability of 29%.

  In the present embodiment, when a big win that is advantageous to the player is won by drawing the first special symbol, a big hit game is executed in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds, and the game If the winning jackpot that is advantageous to the player is selected, the jackpot game that opens the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 for 16 rounds is executed, so the jackpot type won this time is advantageous. It is possible for a player to determine whether or not the game is a jackpot game, but this is not the only case, and if the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player or if the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player The jackpot game for opening the same winning device (for example, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65) may be executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily discriminating whether or not the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous based on the game content of the jackpot game. It is possible to predict what the gaming state is set after the end until immediately before the gaming state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game, each winning device (in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot disadvantageous to the player) The content of controlling the operation of the open / close doors (open / close door 65f1, open / close door 650f1) so that the first attacker 65 and the second attacker 650) are in the open state or the closed state is the same, and it corresponds to the big hit that is advantageous to the player For the opening operation scenario, the operation control content for the switching member 650h is defined as the operation control content for allowing the ball to easily pass through the specific area. For the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the switching member 650h is used. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the operation | movement control content which a ball | bowl becomes difficult to pass a specific area | region may be prescribed | regulated as operation control content with respect.

  Further, the operation control content of the switching member 650h is made the same in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and each winning apparatus (first The timing of operation control of the open / close doors (open / close door 65f1 and open / close door 650f1) may be different so that the attacker 65 and the second attacker 650) are opened or closed. The execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different by changing the length of the waiting period (opening period) from the execution until the first round game is executed. This makes it possible to execute a jackpot game that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area and a jackpot game that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area. It may be.

  The “big hit D” is executed by the same big hit game as the “big hit B” described above, so the detailed description of the big hit game will be omitted, but the “big hit D” is selected only by the lottery of the second special symbol. This is different from jackpot B, and after the jackpot game of “jackpot D” is completed, the latent state is set, so that the jackpot game is most advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured to set the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. Therefore, it is possible not only to make the player expect to win a jackpot, but also to be interested in the type of special symbol won in the jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the number of jackpots is four, but is not limited thereto, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Also, different jackpot types may be selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if they are the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type that is executed with a larger number of rounds when a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the player with the second special symbol can be more successful It can be expected. Therefore, hitting in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the game preference in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the player wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be performed for a longer time.

  Further, the type of jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. You may comprise so that only a range may differ. As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, the contents defined in the probability variation / latency probability table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation / latency probability table 202d2. The probability variation / latency probability table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the probability variation / latency probability table 202d2 includes a special symbol type (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2) won in the jackpot, and the obtained value of the first per-type counter C2. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with each other.

  The probability variation / latency probability table 202d2 differs from the normal table 202d1 in that the gaming state is referred to in the probability variation state or the latent probability state, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol ( In the special figure 1), in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 59”, “big hit A” is defined, and in the range of “60 to 84”, “big hit B” ”Is defined, and the range of“ 85 to 99 ”is different in that“ big hit C ”is defined.

  The small hitting type counter C5 determines the small hitting type when the special symbol is small hitting, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and is a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). 99), one by one is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball, and stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203 at the timing of the ball entering the second entrance 640. .

  The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit, in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed, the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 are set. The type of small hit (the content of the small hit game) is determined using the small hit type selection table 202g.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14B, the small hit type selection table 202g will be described. In this small hit type selection table 202g, two types of small hit types are defined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, “small hit A” is defined for the range of the acquired small hit type counter value “0 to 49”, and “small hit B” is defined for the range of “50 to 99”. .

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the winning arrangement is made only by the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, when winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol which is changing at the same time according to the type of the small hit is temporarily stopped or forcedly stopped by the off symbol doing. Specifically, in the case of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, if the small hit type is “small hit A”, the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is temporarily stopped, If it is “Batch B”, it is forcibly stopped when it comes off.

  With this configuration, even when the special figure 2 game is executed during the latent state, even if the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is a change indicating a big hit, 2 Since it is configured to win a small win with a probability of 1/2 in a special symbol lottery, it will prevent a player from winning a disadvantageous jackpot by temporarily stopping or forcibly stopping with a missed symbol be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of small hits to be won is two, but may be two or less, or may be three or more. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to provide a small hit type that does not stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and to give a more thrilling feeling to the player, and to provide various game playability it can.

  In addition, it is configured to win a small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and the small hit type (small hit game) depending on the type of the special symbol won in the small hit In the case of configuring to (content), the small hit type selection table may be set so as to define a different small hit type (small hit game content) for each special symbol type.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It has been.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used in a state where a normal state is set as a gaming state and a probability change table 202e2 used in a state where a probability change state is set. And a latent probability table 202e3 used in a state where the latent probability state is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is varied according to the gaming state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is varied. be able to.

  Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202e1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the second special symbol with respect to the variation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. The fluctuation time set for the lottery is specified to be long.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is “big hit (win)”, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 50”. Each range of normal reach is defined in association with a variation time of 20 seconds, and super reach A is defined in a range of “51 to 100” in association with a variation time of 30 seconds. The range is defined in association with Super Reach B per 30 seconds of variation time, and the range of “151 to 198” is defined in association with Super Reach C per 30 seconds of variation time.

  Further, the lottery result is “out”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short deviation of 8 seconds in the range of “0-50”, and the variation time in the range of “51-70”. Is defined in association with a long deviation of 12 seconds, a fluctuation time is defined in the range of “71 to 150” in association with a normal reach of 20 seconds, and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds in the range of “151 to 170”. Super reach A is defined in association with each other, and a super reach B with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with “171 to 198”.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the variation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) is not related to the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. (Fluctuation per long, Fluctuation per long, Fluctuation out of long) are set.

  Here, as described above, the present embodiment is configured such that a ball can enter the second entrance 640 when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state. However, as described above, since the long time (10 minutes) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 during the normal state. A game, that is, a game for executing a lottery of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type. However, the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. Different variation pattern tables may be used for the jackpot type and for the jackpot type indicating the other jackpot (big jackpot B). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type showing another jackpot is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type showing an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A). It is preferable that the time variation pattern is configured to be easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more the player can expect a game result that will be advantageous to the player. be able to.

  In addition, it is easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time in the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type showing the normal jackpot than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type showing the probability variation jackpot. In this way, when a big win is won with a short variation time, an unexpected game result can be provided to the player, even if a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 18A, the probability variation table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is “winning (big hit)”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “ Normal fluctuation is defined per 10 seconds of fluctuation time in the range of “0 to 99”, and super fluctuation is defined per fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of “100 to 198”. Further, in the case of “out”, an out-of-range variation with a variation time of 8 seconds is defined in the range where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198”, that is, the entire range.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the variation pattern having a variation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. (Winning fluctuation, small hitting fluctuation, outlier fluctuation) are stipulated.

  As described above, during the probability variation state, a shorter variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol than during the normal state. Furthermore, it is configured such that the reserved memory of the second special symbol cannot be newly acquired (difficulty) during the probability change state. Therefore, once it shifts to the probability change state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested in a short period of time.

  Also, the variation time (8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol all overlaps with the variation time that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. By configuring and grasping the variation time of the first special symbol, it may be difficult to easily determine whether the current gaming state is a normal state or a probable variation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that a variation time in which the player can determine which gaming state is set is set.

  Next, the contents of the latent probability table 202e3 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 17B, in the latent probability table 202e3, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. When a fluctuation pattern of 10 minutes of fluctuation time (long fluctuation per hit, long fluctuation off) is specified and the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the lottery result of the special symbol or the acquired variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern (a short-circuit fluctuation, a small hit short-circuit fluctuation, an out-of-circuit short-circuit fluctuation) having a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined.

  Thus, during the latent state, unlike the other gaming states, the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set shorter than the variation time corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the lottery of the first special symbol (that is, the special symbol 2 game).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the big win or the small win is won by the variation of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped. In this manner, during the latent state, the first special symbol is changed only to the 10-minute variation pattern, and the second special symbol variation is composed of only the one-second variation pattern, so that the first special symbol variation is almost certainly achieved. Can be forcibly stopped, and it is possible to prevent winning a jackpot disadvantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol is configured to have only a 10-minute variation pattern, but a shorter variation pattern (for example, 30 seconds) may be configured to be executed. . With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of game characteristics such as whether or not the special figure 2 game can prevent winning a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Returning to FIG. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the second random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the winning random number set by, it is determined that it is a normal symbol (second symbol). In addition, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for low probability of a normal symbol, and one for high probability with a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  The contents defined in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11C, when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is defined within the range of “0 to 10”, and the normal symbol hit is high, and the normal symbol high probability In the case of the state, the winning number is specified in the range of “0 to 231” in the acquired second random number counter C4.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  The normal fluctuation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The value of the normal variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the common figure fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, using the acquired value of the common figure fluctuation type counter CS2. It is configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the contents defined in the common map variation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the common map variation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 18, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired common figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of “0 to 198”. Is done. When the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the acquired general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of “0 to 198”, it is specified that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. doing.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the game state of the normal symbol and the value of the common symbol variation type counter CS2. The easiness of entering the sphere into the lower first entrance 64b2 is varied depending on the variation time. Thereby, in each gaming state, since it is possible to limit the lottery act of the second special symbol that is easy to obtain a lottery result advantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from being given excessive benefits. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 52), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is immediately input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 50) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, Second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation number counter 203h, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, time reduction It has a flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a small hit flag 203p, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

  In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the above. Further, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the fact that up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), game balls have entered the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a storage area for storing various counter values.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of the winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 (start prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), The values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), each of the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 is read from the counter buffer in the same manner as the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Values are acquired and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in the same manner.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of special symbol variation (lottery), in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data (values of counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b described above, one The data corresponding to the start winning is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c includes each of the second per-random number counter C4 and the common figure variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning prize). This is a storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is read from the counter buffer. The value of the common symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the values of the counters C4 and CS2) can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls are stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacated in the order in which the data is vacant, in the order of passing to the through gate 67 (start winning prize). .

  When the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol wins lottery. Or a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the normal variation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting prize is used as the normal winning prize. Shift to a symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 28) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the entrance 64b1, the lower 1st entrance 64b2, or the second entrance 640, the variable display effect (changes performed at the 3rd symbol display device 81) performed at the 1st symbol display device 37. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each of the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of (display effects). The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the fact that a ball has entered (start winning prize) in the second entrance 640. When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 receives each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown). Are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), the first special symbol change start process (See S210 in FIG. 30) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. To do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f passes through the through gate 67 detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 28) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ) Is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) for variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S2106 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the normal symbol variation display is executed (see S2005 in FIG. 48).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of a special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, the gaming state indicates a high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of a special symbol, and if it is OFF, the probability state of a special symbol is low (normal state). It shows that there is. In this embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (see S2706 and S2708 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to OFF (see S813 in FIG. 34, S1510 in FIG. 42). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability variation counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of jackpots after the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the number of jackpots reaches three, regardless of which jackpot type is won, the normal state is set after the end of the third jackpot game. This probability variation counter 203h is incremented until the value reaches the upper limit of 2 after the jackpot game ends (S2704 in FIG. 55), and is reset to 0 when the upper limit is 2 (in FIG. 55). S2703). The probability variation counter 203h is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter is configured to be added at the end of the jackpot, but may be added at the start of the jackpot game. In addition, although the upper limit value is set to 2, it is not limited thereto, and may be 2 or less, or 3 or more. With such a configuration, various game playability can be provided.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) when the lottery result is a small hit A (S1604 in FIG. 43). Reference is made in the variation process (see FIG. 29) (S202 in FIG. 29). When it is set to ON in the process of S202, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is performed in the same manner as when changing (FIG. 29). S203). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it can be notified that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i to ON. If it is determined that the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 33) is set to ON (S701 in FIG. 33: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 33).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot according to the jackpot type (the jackpot game is The process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are temporarily stopped. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination indicating a small hit, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (small hit game) Is stopped until it is finished), or is stopped when it comes off.

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the game result that is most advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit), and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) of the special figure 2 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) when the lottery result is a big hit B (S832 in FIG. 35), and the special symbol fluctuation Reference is made in the processing (see FIG. 29) (S204 in FIG. 29). When it is set to ON in the process of S204, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is performed in the same manner as when changing (FIG. 29). S205). That is, while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j to ON. If it is determined that the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 41) is set to ON (S1401: Yes in FIG. 41), it is set to OFF (S1403 in FIG. 41).

  The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is set after the jackpot game is finished (setting state of the probability change flag 203g and the short time flag 203m). The gaming state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF and the hourly flag 203m is set to OFF, and the probability variation state is set when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON and the hourly flag 203m is set to ON. The latent state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON and the time reduction flag 203m is set to OFF.

  Furthermore, in a state where a jackpot game or a small hit game is being executed, a winning game state (a big hit state, a small hit state) indicating that each hit game is being executed, and a jackpot game being executed The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

  Then, based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203k, a state command is set, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub state setting area 223k.

  The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to hold the information even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 51), a state command corresponding to information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set.

  Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the current gaming state.

  The time reduction flag 203m is a flag for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and is turned on when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. The short time flag 203m is set to ON after the jackpot game ends in correspondence with the winning jackpot type (S2706 in FIG. 55). And it is set off when winning the jackpot game. Thereby, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol high probability state is set, at least until the next jackpot is won, the normal symbol high probability state is configured to continue. Without being limited to the configuration, for example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be ended. Specifically, when a lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small winning prize), or a predetermined lottery result When the number of times (for example, small hit) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times), it may be configured to end the high probability state of the normal symbol. When a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached, the normal symbol high probability state may be terminated.

  In this case, it is preferable that the above-described end condition is made different according to the winning jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning. Thereby, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how long the high probability state of the normal symbol will continue.

  The big hit flag 203n is based on the fact that the ball has entered the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2 or the second entrance 640, and the value of the obtained first hit random number counter C1 is This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the game is a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised with the flag which can identify whether it is a jackpot corresponding to which symbol of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, “10” is set to the jackpot flag 203n for the first special symbol, and “01” is set to the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol, At “00”, the big hit flag 203n is set as OFF.

  Here, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to distinguish between the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol, so that at the start of the special symbol variation, When either one of the second special symbols is set to ON first, even if the other lottery result is a big win, the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to each special symbol jackpot is set to ON. .

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and both special symbols are big hits. If you win, you will run a jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol on which the special symbol variation has been stopped first (special symbol confirmation display), and the special symbol variation will stop first (the special symbol confirmation display) ), Depending on the type of jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of place.

  By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 that can execute a lottery of a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (in parallel), a lottery is won in the lottery of each special symbol, which is excessive for the player at the same time. Generation | occurrence | production of the situation where a privilege (jackpot game) is provided can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, even if you win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special symbol lottery, until the winning result is stopped and displayed (determined display), it will be a jackpot that will be advantageous to the player in the other special symbol lottery It will be possible to win. In this case, it is preferable to execute a fluctuating effect that suggests that the player has won a disadvantageous hit using the fluctuating time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. Thereby, since it can be made to think that it was won per disadvantage with respect to a player, the other special symbol lottery can be actively performed during the fluctuation time.

  In addition, a shorter variation time may be set more easily when winning the jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, during the change of one special symbol won per disadvantage, the other special symbol lottery will be won in favor, and the winning result will be stopped (determined) before the disadvantaged win result. it can.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n that can separately store the lottery result of the first special symbol (winning winning) and the lottery result of the second special symbol (winning winning) is used, but this is not limitative. There is no common jackpot flag for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203n is turned on when either of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won. The other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag 203n set to ON may be configured not to win a jackpot.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot A or jackpot C of the first special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Inside, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, it is set to ON. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in S805 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, in the process of S902 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 of FIG. 36), it is set to OFF.

  This prevents the second special symbol that has been forcibly removed and displayed in a stopped state from the second special symbol when the jackpot symbol is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. be able to.

  In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the process related to the second special symbol is executed after the process related to the first special symbol is executed in one special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 33). Is configured to execute the variation process for each special symbol without delay.

  Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), if any special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the big hit control process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110. (S2404 in FIG. 53) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is the special symbol variation process (S204 to S213 in FIG. 29) when the current state is the big hit state or the small hit state (S201: Yes in FIG. 29). Is configured to skip.

  That is, in this embodiment, while the big hit game or the small hit game is executed based on the special symbol lottery result, a new special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed first in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29) In addition, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is used, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, It is possible to suppress execution of new variation processing for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29).

  The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit is won. This small hit flag 203p is set to ON when the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1102 in FIG. 38), and the special symbol variation whose winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. (See S1608 in FIG. 43).

  The special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S511 in FIG. 32). The value is updated (subtracted) each time the first special symbol variation execution process (see S207 in FIG. 33) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). Is discriminated (see S208 in FIG. 29). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S208 in FIG. 29: Yes), a first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol that is fluctuating ( (See S209 in FIG. 34).

  Further, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (see S1653 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the disengagement at the time of the second special symbol jackpot stop display, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, forcibly. It is possible to suppress the first special symbol from being resumed again based on the value remaining in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 39). A value indicating the variation time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 39). The value is updated (subtracted) each time the second special symbol variation execution process (see S213 in FIG. 41) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). Is determined (see S212 in FIG. 29). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S212 of FIG. 29: Yes), a second special symbol fluctuation stop process (in order to stop the second special symbol being fluctuated) ( Step S213 in FIG. 42) is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S808 in FIG. 34). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the disengagement during the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, forcibly. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being resumed again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening / closing the shaft as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the right variable winning device 650. A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k for driving the motor and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 performs various commands and controls on these via the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 50) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and a restart fluctuation pattern selection table 222b.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  When the resumption variation pattern selection table 222b receives a command indicating the resumption of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped, the remaining time A, “remaining time B”, “remaining time C” from the remaining time information storage area. A detailed restart variation pattern is selected based on the stored remaining time. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game with less sense of incongruity by re-selecting the restart variation pattern as the variation pattern that has been temporarily stopped.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20B, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, right-handed flag 223j, subordinate state setting area 223k, special figure 1 provisional A stop flag 223m, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n, a remaining time information storage area 223p, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Are stored with winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81)). This is a counter that counts up to four times the maximum number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the variable effects that are held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It is like that.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls for variable display is added by entering the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, or the main control device When the change display in the special symbol is executed at 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is displayed as a voice lamp control device. It transmits to 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. And stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and also stores the first special symbol stored after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of spheres is displayed in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state becomes a latent state, when the display reserved ball number command is received, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number is set in the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e. The display is controlled to light up accordingly. By configuring in this way, the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent state can be transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on a reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The right-handed flag 223j is set to ON when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more when a jackpot ending command is received. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command is received during the latent state and it is determined that the value is 0, it is set to OFF.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the sub-status setting area 223k, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the current gaming status. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed-up gaming state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 223m is a flag indicating whether the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to ON when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received. Set to off when received.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. The special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON when a special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. Set to off when received.

  The remaining time information storage area 223p is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining time of fluctuation of the special symbol that is temporarily stopped. In this remaining time information storage area 223p, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily suspended special symbol variation display is set, and the variation display of the temporarily suspended special symbol is displayed. The remaining period information stored when setting the resumption effect when resuming is referred.

  The dash end flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the dash mode is ended because the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol remaining when the latent state is set becomes 0, and the first special symbol is reserved. When the ball number command is a command indicating 0, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the change confirmation command is received, it is set to OFF.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when entry to the entrance 64b2 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 22 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display controller 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the entrance is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. In such a case, a power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22B and 22C are displayed. Are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an entry is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored for each back image in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. FIG. 23B shows the rear surfaces A to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. . FIG. 24 shows the back E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 First, between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the rear image on the rear surface E is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is the 3rd pattern in the state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. 24A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 24B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 24C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back image shown to Fig.24 (a), and the back images of Fig.24 (a)-(c) are displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are all rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, a back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The back E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 24A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 24A and 24B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 24A to FIG. 24B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 24A and 24B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface BD can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images shown in FIGS. 24A to 24C so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 24B to 24C and 24C to 24A can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Accordingly, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 24B to 24C and FIGS. 24C to 24A are used for normal use while the images of FIGS. 24A to 24B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. 24B to 24C and 24C to 24A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus made. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be opened repeatedly, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 25). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 26 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (the address “0002H” in FIG. 26 is applicable).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 75 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b)). In step S6303), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 27), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 27, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 75 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81 (a)). ) (See S7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82). When other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 of FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 56. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is maximized. When the values (479, 99, 239, 232, 99 in the present embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is performed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with the ball entering into the first entrance 64 (start winning) or the ball entering into the second entrance 640 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After executing the through-gate passing process, the firing control process is then executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations (judgment determination) and determination based on the acquired counter values, and the determination is performed by predetermined control. In the changed display mode, various commands for controlling the first symbol display device 37 so that the variable display can be performed and for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display effects of the third symbol and the fourth symbol are provided. Control for stopping and displaying in a display mode that sets or displays a determination result (whether or not determination result) is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether the game is a big hit game (big hit) or a small hit game (small hit) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the current state is a big hit game (big hit) or a small hit game (small hit).

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is made (S201: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S202). When it is determined that it is set to (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped is updated (S203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON ( S204). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S204: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure temporarily stopped is updated (S205), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (that is, is off) (S204: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating the winning of the small hit A. In this embodiment, while the small hit A game is being executed, the variation time set in the variation display (special diagram variation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During this period, the temporary display display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped on the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be displayed.

  Further, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the big hit B is won. In the present embodiment, while the jackpot B is set, the first special symbol variation time is not updated, and during that period, the first special symbol display device 37 displays the second special symbol. The mode is configured not to be updated.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the change display of the special symbol that was being executed with the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is temporarily stopped, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted when the special symbol variation being executed has disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variation display is being performed (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The display mode may be the same as the flashing display mode that repeatedly turns off, or the display mode with a slower flashing interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is being performed (for example, the lighting mode is repeatedly turned on and off at 0.5 second intervals). May be used. Furthermore, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be able to display a plurality of color display modes, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when temporarily stopped is used. Also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the current big hit or small hit is not made (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed (S206). If it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process is executed ( S207).

  In the first special symbol variation executing process (S207), in order to vary (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period in which the first special symbol is varied. The process is executed. When the process of S207 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (S207) is 0 (S208). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S208: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S209), and the process proceeds to S211 described later.

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), when the variation time defined in the first special symbol during variation display has elapsed, the variation display is stopped with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a disconnection. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for deleting information related to the jackpot is executed. Details of the first special symbol variation stopping process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not 0 in the process of S208 (S208: No), the process of S209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S211.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S206 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (0) (S206: No), that is, when it is determined that the current special figure 1 fluctuation is not in progress. Next, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S210). In the first special symbol variation start process (S210), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) is executable. If it is in a state where it can be determined and a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process for performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the first special symbol variation start process (S210), after determining that the variation of the special symbol 1 is in the process of S208 (S208: No), or performing the first special symbol variation stop process (S207). After the execution, next, the variation process (S211 to S215) regarding the second special symbol is executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S211). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is currently being displayed. When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (0) in the process of S211 (S211: No), the current situation is that the special figure 2 is not changing. In addition, a second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S212), and this process is terminated.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S212), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the reserved data Processing is executed. In the second special symbol variation start process (S212), if the lottery result is a big hit (or small win), the big hit flag 203n (or the small hit flag 203p) is set to ON.

  On the other hand, in the process of S211, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the current special figure 2 fluctuation is in progress (S211: Yes), then the second A special symbol variation executing process is executed (S213). The contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but the same processing as the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) described above is processed. Is executed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

  When the second special symbol variation executing process (S213) is finished, it is determined whether the current special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S214). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S214). : Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S215), and then this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S214 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  The second special symbol variation stop process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but, like the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), is defined in the second special symbol during the variable display. When the variation time has elapsed, a process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the second special symbol variation stop process (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. Processing is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for deleting information related to the jackpot is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big winner, it corresponds to the small hit or miss Process is executed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In the first special symbol variation process, the variation processing relating to the first special symbol (S206 to S210) and the variation processing relating to the second special symbol (S211 to S215) are executed. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation processing relating to the first special symbol is executed prior to (prioritizing) the variation processing relating to the second special symbol. In this way, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, the first priority is given priority. One special symbol variation stop process is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation process related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed in preference to the variation process related to the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is performed. You may comprise so that a process may be preferentially performed rather than the fluctuation process regarding a 1st special symbol.

  Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute a variation process for a special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player is set according to the set gaming state. If it is the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol type for which the lottery that is advantageous to the switching is performed is switched, it is preferable to provide means for switching the order of the special symbol type for executing the variation processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery advantageous to the player from being extinguished (destroyed) by the lottery result disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S210), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S210).

  In the first special symbol variation starting process (S210 in FIG. 30), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is obtained. It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). ).

  Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a is set as the execution area. The process of sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) will be described in detail later, but using the value of the first special random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not the jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). Although the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is based on the determination result based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol retention ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the special symbol is in a high probability state) (S402: Yes), based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 11A), S401 It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol has a low probability state) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 171a) is used based on the first It is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 per 1 matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

  When the processing of S403 or S404 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (S405). If it is determined that the lottery is a big win (S405: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot winning is determined. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot is won. Information indicating the presence or absence of jackpot for each symbol type is settable. Therefore, in the process of S406, information indicating a big hit is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol in the big hit flag 203n.

  Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 ( S408), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S405: No), the first special symbol outlier is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process ends. To do.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203n is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203n is set to ON in the process of S406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) described above.

  When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is on (S502). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probable change state (a high probability of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol). The probability change flag 203g is turned on in order to set a probability change state after the jackpot ends when it is determined that the winning jackpot type is jackpot A in the processing of S2705 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 55) (S2705: Yes). Is set to In the process of S502, if it is determined that the time reduction flag 203m is off (S502: Yes), since the current gaming state is the normal state, it is obtained from the normal jackpot type selection table 202d1. The current jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter CS2 (S503). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S502 that the time reduction flag 203m is on (S502: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the probability variation jackpot type selection table 202d2, This jackpot type is determined (S504). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (that is, the big hit flag 203n is off), it is not necessary to determine the big hit type, so the processes of S502 to S504 are skipped. , The process proceeds to S505.

  In this embodiment, as described above, since the jackpot type to be won is set to be different based on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, the player always plays the game while being excited about which jackpot type to win. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined based on the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined based on the number of held balls when the jackpot is won.

  After the processing of any one of S501, S503, and S504 is completed, next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S505) and stored in the gaming state storage area 203k. The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, probability variation state) corresponding to the information being read is read (S506).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S505 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read out in the process of S506 (S507), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S507. Then, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S508).

  Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S509), the first special symbol display device 37 is set to start fluctuation of the first special symbol (S510), and the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r (S511), and this process ends.

  Next, the first special symbol variation executing process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S207). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), the special symbol interrupted due to the process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and the winning of the second special symbol in the lottery A process for resuming the symbol variation is executed.

  In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when the small special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols wins a small bonus, the small bonus type is small hit A, and the other special symbol is variably displayed, the other special symbol variation is determined for a predetermined period. (Period from the small winning game until the small winning game is finished) is interrupted, and after the predetermined period (after the small winning game is finished), the other special symbol variation is resumed again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game that is difficult to understand for the player from being executed due to the end of the other special symbol variation during the one small hit game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since it is configured to determine whether the variation of the other special symbol is interrupted or discarded depending on the winning type of winning, the player has won which winning type Whether or not you can enjoy the game.

  In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to OFF (S703), the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated. .

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 29). 31 (see S205 in FIG. 31) is executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (see S207 in FIG. 32). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when the variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol, “15000” is set as the value of the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203r, and the value becomes 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON (S701: No), that is, when it is determined that the small bonus is not won in the second special symbol lottery. Skips the processing of S702 and S703, and proceeds to the processing of S704.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S209). In the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is currently “0”, that is, the variation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). This process is executed when the time has elapsed.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S801). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is a jackpot A or a jackpot C. (S802). When it is determined that the jackpot type is not A or C (S802: No), the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) is executed, and the process proceeds to S812.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 of FIG. 34), will be described. In this special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), when the process of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed, when the fluctuation result is a big hit B, the fluctuation for the second special symbol is interrupted. Execute the process.

  In the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S831). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S831: No), it is necessary to interrupt (temporarily stop) the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S831, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S831: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S832). Then, a special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is turned on is set (S833), and this process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot B is won by the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and the second special symbol is resumed again after the jackpot game ends. ing. By configuring in this way, the current jackpot type can provide a game that is intriguing to the player, whether the change of the second special symbol is interrupted or forcibly stopped due to the change. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is won, the second special symbol is configured to temporarily stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to temporarily stop when a specific result is obtained. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling feeling that it is not known when the other special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S802, when it is determined that the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C (S802: Yes), a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S804). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S804: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S805), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S806).

  Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S807), and the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S808). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in a display mode (out-of-line symbol) indicating detachment. (Determined display).

  When the processing of S808 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is set to ON (S809), and if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S809: Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S807 described above, the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is turned off. The information is set (S810), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S811), and the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, in the process of S809, when it is determined that the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processes of S810 and 811 are skipped and the process proceeds to S812.

  In the process of S812, first, the jackpot scenario won by the special symbol variation this time is set (S812), and then the jackpot flag 202u, the probability variation flag 203g, and the hourly flag 203m corresponding to the first special symbol are set to OFF ( S813), the game state storage area 203k stores information indicating that the current game state is jackpot (during jackpot game) (S814). The game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to store separately a game state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability state) related to a lottery game and a game state (big hit / medium / small hit) related to a winning game. By executing the processing of S811, the game state (the normal state, the probability variation state, the latent state) relating to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is being stored are stored. .

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the gaming state set at the timing of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot game.

  When the process of S814 is completed, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S815), and the first special symbol display device is set. The process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol variably displayed by 37 is performed (S816), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S814 is skipped, and the above-described process of S815 is performed. Transition to processing.

  As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), the process (S812 to S816) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery (first lottery game) result of the first special symbol is executed. If the current lottery result is a big hit (S801: Yes), the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S807). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying one special symbol with the symbol indicating the big hit (determined display), by configuring the processing to forcibly stop the other special symbol that is changing, at the same time, Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations to be executed.

  That is, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the variation process related to the first special symbol and the variation process related to the second special symbol are sequentially performed, the process is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. The second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation process for the second special symbol is not executed by executing the variation process (forcible stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation process for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processes related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processes smoothly.

  In this embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the symbol indicating detachment at the timing when one special symbol stops displaying with the symbol indicating jackpot. For example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols wins the jackpot, that is, when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) that the current lottery result is a jackpot ( In FIG. 31, S405: Yes), the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable that a special variation that is not won in the jackpot is executed for the other special symbol that is forcibly removed and stopped until the jackpot variation of one special symbol is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the special symbol variation of the other is forcibly stopped when the big win is won with one special symbol. Therefore, it can be determined that the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the player can be prevented from grasping whether or not a big win is won.

  In addition, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol being executed, the variation control content is made different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol, when the variation to indicate that the lottery of the second special symbol is out of place (outside variation), the lottery During the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a win (big hit, small win), forcibly stopping the result and forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

  In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the player is interested in whether the new second special symbol variation is executed or the suspended second special symbol variation is resumed. A game can be performed. In addition, when such a configuration is used, a suggestion effect for instructing the player of the situation of the second special symbol (whether it is interrupted) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. Good.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S212), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S212).

  When the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 31) performed immediately before this processing is executed (within the same special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29)). )) To determine whether or not you win a jackpot.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is displayed. The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second After the special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, a new second special symbol variation is prohibited from being executed. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S901 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to on (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off. Therefore, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) can be skipped only once by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o.

  This is because the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S212) is executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31)), if the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is thereafter The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), and the jackpot game is ended by the process in S201 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is not executed until the process is performed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the fluctuation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol. The processing load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (a jackpot winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (displayed with a dismissed symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. Until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set so that the new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol is not executed, and the other special symbol variation process is performed. However, a configuration other than this may be used.

  In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (a jackpot winning), do not win a jackpot in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning is over For example, when a jackpot control process (see S2512 in FIG. 53) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 described later, The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be set to off.

  By configuring in this way, even if the timing for turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit execution of a variation (lottery) of a new second special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36) is executed in a state where the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON, the variation of the second special symbol The processing is skipped, that is, a new variation is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special diagram 2 variation stop flag 203o is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the dedicated second special symbol.

  In this case, a lottery of the second special symbol is performed using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. The period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

  It should be noted that the contents of the variation processing relating to each of the special symbols described above are configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the contents, and the third symbol display device. The variable display of the 3rd and 4th symbols displayed in the 81 main display area Dm can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the 1st symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In such a case, the 3rd symbol corresponding to the 2nd special symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 or the 4th symbol is used to execute the variation effect during the forced stop. Also good.

  In this way, the actual second special is displayed using each symbol (the third symbol and the fourth symbol) that are displayed in a synchronized manner with the variable symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 that is easily visible to the player. Even in the case where the variation effect is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped, it is difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not displayed as a big hit symbol (S901: No), S903 to S909. This process is executed and the present process is terminated. The processing of S903 to S909 is the same as that of the first special symbol change start processing (S210 of FIG. 30) from S301 to S307. The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the second special symbol reserved ball number The counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S908), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909) Since it is the same except for the changed point, its description is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31). And some other processes are added.

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408. When the target is changed from Special Figure 1 (first special symbol) to Special Figure 2 (second special symbol) in the processing of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the above processing, and when the special symbol lottery result is out of place The difference is that the processing to be executed is changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37), when it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1009), and this process ends. To do.

  This special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009) is a process executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big hit, that is, the small hit or miss. The detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. However, when the lottery result is out, the same process as the process of S409 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of FIG. 35) described above is executed. If the lottery result is a small win, processing corresponding to the small win is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009).

  In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1009), first, is the current lottery result (the lottery result obtained in S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S905 in FIG. 36)) a small hit? Is discriminated (S1101).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1101 that a small win is won (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small win (S1103). Then, the small special symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1104), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is a disengagement (S1101: No), an out symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Set (S1105), the process is terminated.

  As described above, the special symbol 2 deviation variation process (S1009 in FIG. 38) executed as one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36), that is, the special symbol variation (lottery) When it is determined that the small hit is won in the process executed at the timing of starting the game, by setting the small hit flag 203x to ON, the setting state of the small hit flag 203x at the second special symbol variation stop timing Based on this, it is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small win.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 39) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the first special symbol lottery result) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the second special symbol lottery result), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to the above processes, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, the special symbol 2 out-of-range variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36). The contents of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 40) will be described.

  When the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, determination is performed based on the lottery result acquired in S1003 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S908 of FIG. 37) or S1004.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 A small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit type, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the small hit type, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined for the range of values of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1302 and S1303. A different type of small hit may be selected depending on the process.

  When the processing of S1303 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is then read (S1304), and small hitting is performed based on the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation pattern (small hit fluctuation pattern) is selected (S1305). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the processing of S1305 is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (displaced) (S1301: No), the process (S1307 to S1309) when the lottery result is out is executed. In the process of S1307, first, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the gaming state is read (S1307), a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and the variation pattern selection table is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 A variation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S213), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation executing process (S213). A process for executing the update of the variation of the second special symbol is executed, and when the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, a process for resuming the variation is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation executing process (S213), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203j is on (S1401). When the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is on, that is, when it is determined that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S1401: Yes), the special figure 2 for resuming the fluctuation of the second special symbol. A restart command is set (S1402), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to OFF (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1404 because the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped.

  After executing the processing of S1401 or S1403, next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is subtracted and updated (S1404), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S1405), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation stop process (S215), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S215). In the second special symbol variation stop process (S215), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 33). The fact that the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big win has been changed, the process of setting the flag to stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted, and the current lottery result is a big hit However, when it is determined that it is not (S1501: No), it is different from the point that the special figure 2 off stop processing (S1514) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the contents of the special figure 2 off stop process (S1508) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop process (S1508). This special figure 2 outage stop process (S1508) is a special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the case where the lottery result acquired in the second big hit determination process (see S908 in FIG. 37) is other than a big hit (small hit or out). A stop process is executed, and a process of canceling (forcibly stopping) or temporarily stopping a change in the first special symbol is executed according to the selected small hit type.

  When the special figure 2 off stop processing (S1614) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit type selected this time is a small hit A (S1602). When it is determined that the small hit type selected this time is small hit A (S1602: Yes), a process for temporarily stopping the variation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 or more, that is, whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S1603). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1603: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to on (S1604), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is turned on. Is set (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S1603: No), the first special symbol is not changing, so the processes of S1604 to S1605 are skipped and the process of S1607 is performed. Migrate to

  In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol is selected to win a small hit, and the first special symbol change is temporarily stopped (suspended) when the second special symbol changes and stopped according to the selected small hit type. ), Or a process of forcibly stopping when it comes off. As described above, when the winning small hit type is the small hit A, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, and the special figure 1 temporary stop command is sent to the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 52). Is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in (see FIG. 4). Then, when the special lamp 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been temporarily stopped is shown. A display command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display shown in FIG. 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. By comprising in this way, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain easily that the 1st special symbol has stopped temporarily.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that the winning small hit type is not A (that is, the small hit B is), the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606) is executed, and in S1607 Transition to processing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606) which is one process of the special figure 2 off stop process (S1514 in FIG. 43) will be described. In this special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), when the process of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, when the fluctuation result is a small hit B, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Execute the process.

  In the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (S1651: No), it is not necessary to forcibly stop the first special symbol, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1651 that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1651: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1652). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by an external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 described later. When the special lamp 1 fluctuation stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the off stop mode is used to indicate that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been forcibly stopped due to a disconnection. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is output to the display control device 114.

  Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S1654). Then, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1655), and the process proceeds to S1656. In the processing of S1656, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203n corresponding to FIG. 1 is on (S1656). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is off (S1656: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n is set to off (S1657), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1658), and this processing is terminated. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not on (S1656: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the present embodiment, when the small hit B is won in the special figure 2 game, the special figure 1 change being executed is forcibly stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a win that is disadvantageous to the player during the latent game and to prevent the game from being spoiled, and a safe game can be provided.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the control for changing the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the lottery game is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed at the same time, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, Since the change display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In the present embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the symbol indicating the big hit (big hit symbol) or the small bonus symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly set. Although it is configured to stop display with an out symbol, not limited to this, depending on the winning jackpot type or small hit type, the other special symbol is displayed in a variable state with temporary stop or measurement of the fluctuation time suspended. It is composed. With this configuration, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress. It is possible to grasp that it has not disappeared, and it is possible to play a jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), it is determined whether the ball has entered (start winning prize) in any of the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640. In the case of starting winning, each of the reserved upper limit numbers (up to 4 at the upper first entrance 64b1 and 4 at the lower first entrance 64b2 and up to 4 at the second entrance 640) are obtained. This is a process of storing the counter value in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b.

  When each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process for predicting a determination result (a so-called pre-read process) is performed. . Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (start winning prize) in the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 as the first start opening. (S1701). Here, the entrance of a sphere into a sphere detection switch (not shown) provided in the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 (there is a start prize) (S1701: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1) ) Is acquired (S1702), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

  That is, is the number of reserves for the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 currently less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether the reserve count is stored up to the upper limit)? ) Is determined. When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (1704), and the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Is set to a reserved ball number command for notifying the number of reserved first starting holes (the number of first right lottery rights reserved) (S1705).

  Then, each value of the various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is obtained. Each is stored (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of held balls 203a (S1706).

  Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S1707). The first look-ahead process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, but the result of the determination of the success / failure and the change pattern to be determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Then, processing for determining the stop type and the like is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like based on each newly stored counter value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the determination result or the variation pattern to be determined for all the stored memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, You may comprise so that the process which discriminate | determines a stop classification etc. may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when a lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the lottery right for the second special symbol (winning information) ) May be determined in advance.

  Then, when the process of S1707 is executed, the process of S1708 is executed next. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 in the process of S1701 (S1701: No), or the process of S1703 When it is determined that the number of reserves for the first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 is the upper limit value (S1703: No), a process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserve ball counter 203d Is skipped and the process proceeds to S1708.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead process (S1707) based on the added information related to winning (winning information) is performed. For example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1703 (S1703). : No), that is, the first prefetching process (S1707) may be executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. You may comprise so that it can. Thereby, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to cause the player to continue to play the game in order to execute the prefetching process. In addition, when a ball is entered into the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to add value. Therefore, when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, the willingness to play is reduced. This can be suppressed.

  Next, for each process from S1708 to S1714, a winning of a ball to the first starting port (upper first entrance 64b1 or lower first entrance 64b2) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707 is performed. The only difference is that the process similar to the process performed for the second entrance 640 is the same as the process performed on the second entrance 640, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the present embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the processing of S1713.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the first prefetch process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process (S1707).

  In the first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 46), first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area where the winning order is smallest among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch hold storage area (S1822).

  If it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is a jackpot (a jackpot only in a low probability state, a jackpot only in a high probability state, a jackpot in both a low probability state and a high probability state) (S1823: Yes), A first winning command indicating the conditions for winning (the game state set at the time of the lottery) and the jackpot type in the case of winning is set (S1824), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of the high probability state or the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the outage is set. (S1825), this process ends.

  Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes, in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result), as common information, Information including the values of various counter values read by the processing of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, the display mode of the holding ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is different from the normal color). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) that is displayed in a variable manner, or that a preview symbol or the like is displayed before the start of change and a player is informed of the determination result.

  In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading process is executed, the determination result of the special symbol in the high probability state and the determination result in the special symbol low probability state are determined, and the result of each determination However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a determination value that is determined to be a big hit even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The value of the first random number counter C1) may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read out.

  By configuring in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the sound lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. The expectation of winning a big hit can be given to fluctuations.

  Furthermore, the gaming state when the special symbol lottery based on the holding memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the gaming state. You may comprise so that a determination may be made. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not varied depending on the number of reserved balls, but it is possible to make a determination by configuring a certain variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the prefetching is executed, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the change order until the change of the hold ball starts to change based on the stored information.

  In the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information (stored) newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the prefetching process of the main controller 110 is not limited to this. The information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the “holding storage” is set as a winning command, and the determination result is determined based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

  With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is displayed. It is good to comprise so that it may analyze (prediction of a decision result). Thereby, when the prefetch effect is not executed, since specific prefetch processing (prediction of the determination result) is not executed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from performing unnecessary control. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem that a player illegally obtains the result of the prefetching process executed untitled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the second prefetch process (S1714) which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch process (S1714). In the second prefetching process (S1714 in FIG. 47), the first prefetching process (S1707 in FIG. 46) is performed when the ball enters the first starting port (upper first entrance 64b1 or lower first entrance 64b2). This is a process of determining (pre-reading) the hold data (winning information) based on the ball (start winning prize) in advance and making various determinations, whereas the target to be determined was started at the first starting opening. The winning information is based on the fact that the winning information is changed to the winning information based on the start winning at the second starting port (second entrance 640), and the other processes are the same. The detailed explanation is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S2001). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning symbol (after the winning symbol is stopped). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not in progress, that is, the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is executable (S2002: No), the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f A value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2004).

  If it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the process of S2004 (S2004: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S2005). That is, if it is determined in the process of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (the winning information to be used for the normal symbol variation is stored on hold) is established, the processing is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is decremented by 1.

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 203m is on, that is, whether or not the current symbol is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S2008), and it is determined that the hour / short flag 203m is set to on. (S2008: Yes), the success / failure determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the winning determination value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) for high probability, and the process proceeds to S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / short flag 203m is off (S2008: No), the determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) for low probability. Is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

  In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a win (S2011), and if it is determined that it is a win (S2011: Yes), the display mode of “O” that is the display mode at the time of winning is determined. The display mode is set (S2012), and the normal symbol change time is determined based on the normal change pattern using the value of the normal change type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2011 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (is a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of “x”, which is the display mode at the time of a miss, is set. (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014 described above.

  Here, the process for determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the process of S2014) will be described using the contents defined in the common figure fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the set normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (ordinary symbol hold number), It is configured to variably set based on the above. The ease of entering the sphere into the lower first entrance 64b2 is different depending on the set normal symbol variation time.

  As described above, the normal time fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) defines a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. When a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a winning game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.8 seconds is set after a closing period of 0.1 seconds (opening period) (Game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, since the game that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entrance 64b2, the game per game is finished, so that ball Is configured so as not to enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a different variation time is set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol (value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f), When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is defined as 30 seconds. When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the normal symbol A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is defined as the fluctuation time.

  When a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, a winning game based on an open pattern in which a 0.7 second open period is set after a 0.1 second close period (opening period) (Game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of retained balls of the normal symbol is 0, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entrance 64b2 (through the through gate 67). Since the normal symbol variation (30 seconds variation) is being executed at 1.6 seconds after passing), the ball cannot enter the lower first entrance 64b2. In the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of retained balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entrance 64b2 ( Since 1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), the game is executed per game, so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640.

  In this way, the lower first entrance 64b2 is configured by varying the amount of the ball entering the lower first entrance 64b2 in accordance with the length of the set normal symbol variation time. Since the ease of entering the ball into the ball can be easily changed according to the gaming state, various gaming properties can be created.

  In addition, as described above, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2 regardless of whether the normal symbol variation time is shorter or longer than the appropriate range. Therefore, for example, even in a gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) where it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Different fluctuation times may be set based on the value of the normal fluctuation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner (S2002: No), the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, if the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol “◯” is stopped (lighted). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out of place, the “x” symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display). That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the processing of S2016, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second display in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013. The symbol display unit 83 is stopped (lighted up).

  Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result of normal symbols is a win (S2017). If it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the open / close control mode (open pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol lottery result of this time is not a winning symbol (S2017: No), this process is terminated.

  Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct (timing for performing the processing of S2008 to S2011). The probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a (the timing when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). Based on the state (high probability state, low probability state), the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the variation process (lottery process) related to the normal symbol and the variation process (lottery process) related to the special symbol are executed independently. The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process. Therefore, depending on the result of the fluctuation process (lottery process) related to the special symbol that is executed in parallel during the period during which the fluctuation process (lottery process) related to the normal symbol is executed, the normal symbol may be used at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is successful. When the high probability state is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 64a If the pattern) is set, the open pattern that is executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the electric accessory 64a is long open (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. An opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 64a is set. Thereby, the electric accessory 64a can be opened with an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In the process of S2017, if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S2017: Yes), then to determine the current normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state). In addition, it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 203m is on (S2018), and when it is determined that the hour / hour flag 203m is not on (off), that is, the current state is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S2018: No), as an open pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol, an open pattern “0.7 seconds × 1 time” for executing 0.7 seconds once is set (S2019).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2018 that the time reduction flag 203m is set to ON (S2018: Yes), the release for 0.8 seconds is executed once as the release pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol. An opening pattern “0.8 seconds × 1 time” is set (S2020). That is, in this embodiment, the release pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds × 1 time) is more than the release pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds × 1 time). The electric combination 64a is opened for a long period. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a, the game with the high probability state of the normal symbol is more advantageous to the player than the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The period during which the first entrance 64b2 is in an open state is long).

  Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the normal symbol success / failure determination is performed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is determined, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 64a that is movable in the winning game of the normal symbol is determined. Although the configuration is such that the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a that is moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 64a may be configured to be opened long only when it is, or set at the timing for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. And based on the gaming state it is, may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric combination thereof 64a.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the usual fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined based on the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the usual figure fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). As shown in FIG. 18, in the usual figure variation pattern table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state and the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol. Except for the probability variation state (probability variation: with electric support), there is one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal variation variation counter.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the through gate passage process executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S2002: Yes), since the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103). , The process proceeds to S2106.

  When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 detects a launch abnormality. A first abnormality notification mode (not shown) to be displayed is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether the state is a certain state (a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a normal symbol) (S2104). If it is determined that the state is a latent state (S2104: Yes), a second notification indicating a firing abnormality A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not the probability change state (latent probability state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to S2106 as it is.

  Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 is executed. A second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating a firing abnormality is displayed.

  In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that a right-handed game is being executed, thereby determining whether or not a right-handed game is being performed. This eliminates the need for providing a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the shot ball has reached the game area beyond the variable display device unit 80), thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. Also, different abnormality notification modes can be easily displayed by setting different notification commands for indicating firing abnormalities according to the gaming state set at the time when the right-handed game is performed. it can.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that a right-handed game is being executed. However, a right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as the operation handle 51 is configured to detect this. For example, a detection unit that detects that the operation handle 51 is operated with a strength (operation amount) that fires a ball to the right-handed region. May be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2103 to S2105 is finished, the processing of S2106 is executed next. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the acquired value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol) Is not reached the upper limit value) (S2107).

  If it is determined in S2107 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2108), a common figure reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to normal. The symbol is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2110), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2201), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304). If it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process shifts to S2312 in this case as well.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S2312 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2313, S2314) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2313, S2314) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2310.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2310). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S2311). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (see FIG. 52), first, output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) External output processing to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 29) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the prize corresponding to the number of balls acquired is paid to the payout control device 111. Send a sphere command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) or the start winning process (see FIG. 45) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, through this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 52), various commands set in the various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This is information for setting a production (variation production, decoration production, etc.). In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing the jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 are executed (S2404).

  The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the jackpot control process (S2404), the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable prize winning for each round of the jackpot state. The device 650 (hereinafter referred to as a prize opening etc.) is opened, and the maximum opening time of the prize opening etc. (the left variable prize winning device 65, the right variable prize winning device 650) has passed or the prize opening etc. (the left variable prize winning device 65). The right variable winning device 650) determines whether a predetermined number of balls have won. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening etc. (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening etc. (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) are repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a small hitting control process related to the small hitting game executed when the special winning lottery is won in the special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In this small hitting control process (S2405), for the right variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small hitting game, a period in which the V winning opening 650a is opened and a period in which the V winning prize opening 650 is closed are predetermined scenarios ( Processing for setting based on the small hit scenario) is executed. Details of the small hit control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is executed (S2406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S2407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), the variation is determined according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) has ended. Then, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 34). The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S507. Also in the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big jackpot symbol) indicating a big jackpot, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (off symbol) indicating a loss. The stop display for that purpose is also executed.

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S2408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, the second symbol display update process (S2408) is executed in the second symbol display apparatus when the stop display of the second symbol display apparatus is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48). The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S2410). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S2410: Yes), the process proceeds to S2401, and the processes after S2401 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S2410: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2411, S2412).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2411 (S2412). In the process of S2412, the value of the normal variation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 are also updated randomly. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and that the illegal game aiming at the timing when the determination value corresponding to the win is acquired is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In the processing of S2409, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, the power-off process after S2413 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2413), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S2414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2415), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2409 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2401 to S2408 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S2401. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S2301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. This is a process for opening or closing (command) setting, winning a prize opening, etc. (specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

  In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether or not it is a timing at which a special symbol jackpot is started (S2501). Specifically, the process of S809 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set. If so, it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends.

  The opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) depending on the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the special symbol big hit or small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A and 5000 for big hit B). In such a case, an opening command may be transmitted. In this way, for example, if a big hit is made in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened. Can be shortened. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, a sufficient time can be secured for switching to a right-handed game (a big hit game). Thereby, the operation burden of the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, when it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S2501: No), it is next determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information related to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k is read out and determined.

  During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S2503: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. The process corresponding to the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, and the switching) The operation process of the member 650h) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505) which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 53) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

  When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started this time is set. An operation scenario is read (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a jackpot game (round game) that performs an opening operation on the first attacker (right variable winning device 650) and a second attacker (variable winning device 65) as a jackpot game. On the other hand, the jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation is configured to be executable, and the process of S2642 described above is a round game that opens the first attacker (right variable winning device 650). It is defined only in the open operation scenario corresponding to the first round game. Therefore, when other round games are executed, a scenario in which the flow path solenoid (probability varying solenoid) 650k is opened in a corresponding open operation scenario (a scenario in which the special discharge flow path 650e2 is communicated by moving the switching member 650h). Is not defined, the process of S2642 is skipped.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed. Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes in FIG. 55), a round for indicating that a new round game is executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 so that the progress status for the jackpot game being executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side can be determined. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main controller 110, the number of round games currently being played can be displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the round command set by the main control device 110 is configured to set a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. Alternatively, a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started may be set. In this case, a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one jackpot game is provided on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the number of round games currently executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side is. And the display mode of the round number display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. In the process of S2504, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 650f1 (S2506). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S2506: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2506 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509). The start timing of the ending effect is the standby time (in this embodiment, the ball opening time) after the final round in the jackpot game (the second round in the case of jackpot A) ends and the door 650f1 is closed. 3 seconds), it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is next determined whether or not it is a big hit end timing (S2511). The jackpot end timing is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (end timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the jackpot end is executed (S2512), this process Exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing for ending the jackpot (S2511), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), the value of the probability variation counter is updated and a high probability state of a special symbol is set according to the winning jackpot type, or a high probability state of a normal symbol based on the winning jackpot type The process of setting is performed.

  When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203h is 3 (S2701). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203h is 3 or more (S2701: Yes), the probability variation number is the upper limit of 3, so the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203m are set to OFF (S2702). The value of the number counter 203h is reset (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in gaming state is set (S2709), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, a probability change state or a latent probability state is set up to three times after the jackpot game ends, and the game state is set to a normal state when the number of times reaches three. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the player can change the probability up to three times or can enjoy the latent game with confidence. In the present embodiment, the probability variation count is configured to be up to 3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be updated 5 times or randomly. With such a configuration, a wide variety of playability can be provided.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203h is not 3 (that is, 2 or less), it is not the timing at which the probability variation ends, so the value of the probability variation counter 203h is incremented by 1. (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is A (S2705). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is A (S2705: Yes), in order to set the probability variation state as the gaming state, the time reduction flag 203m and the probability variation flag 203g are set to ON (S2706), and the above-described S2709 The process is executed and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2705: No), in order to set the latent probability state as the gaming state, the time reduction flag 203m is set to off (S2707), and the probability change flag 203g is set to on ( S2708). Then, the process of S2709 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56, the small hitting control process (S2405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process (S2405). This small hitting control process (S2405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hitting state, various effects corresponding to the small hitting are executed. This is a process for setting information (command) and opening or closing the right variable winning device 650.

  In the small hit control process (S2405), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the small hit start (S2801). If it is the timing for starting the small hit (S2801: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2802), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the small hit (S2801: No), it is determined whether the small hit is being made (S2803). If it is determined that the small hit is not being made (S2803: Yes), it is not necessary to execute the control for the small hit, and thus this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a small hit is being made (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation of the right variable winning device 650 (S2804). If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2804: Yes), the opening solenoid is turned on (S2805), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2804: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the small hits (S2806). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2806: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to OFF (S2807), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing for ending the small hit (S2806: No), this processing is ended.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 71, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S4116 is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 58). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the information on the occurrence of power failure from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), it executes the power-off process in S4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S4116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then Then, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S4004 to S4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If it has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4110. In S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, commands for transmitting various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114 The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later are set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, a command determination process (S4111) that performs a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of this command determination processing (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S4116). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S4111), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not one variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  In the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process ends. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  If it is determined in step S4203 that a special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether a special figure 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received. Is discriminated (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), a stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: No), has the reserved ball number command been received from the main controller 110? It is determined (S4207). Here, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the reserved ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4207 that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). If it is determined in the process of S4209 that a winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this process ends. .

  If it is determined in the processing of S4209 that no winning information command has been received (S4209: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. Details of this state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but based on the state command output from main controller 110, the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent state) of pachinko machine 10 is described. The process of setting the winning state (probable state) and the winning gaming state (medium winning / small winning) in the slave state setting area 223k is executed.

  Next, in the process of S4211, when it is determined that a status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a change stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined in the process of S4213 that a variable stop related command has been received (S4213), the variable stop process is executed (S4214), and this process ends. A detailed description of the fluctuation stop process (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main controller 110. And the process for setting the display mode of the fluctuating effect using the 4th pattern is executed.

  In this embodiment, as a period during which the special symbol fluctuation display is executed, a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is set in advance when the special symbol fluctuation is executed. In the middle of executing the special symbol variation based on this, there is a case where a process for forcibly stopping the special symbol variation is executed according to the result of another special symbol variation. Therefore, the variation stop process (S4214) is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol is stopped in correspondence with the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured to be able to. Thereby, the change situation of a special symbol and the situation of the change effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be synchronized, and the display mode which a player can understand easily can be provided.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4213 that a variable stop related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (S4215), and a temporary stop related command has been received. If it is determined (S4215: Yes), temporary stop related processing is executed (S4216), and this processing ends. Details of the temporary stop-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, but as a result of the special symbol lottery, an effect display corresponding to the temporary stop-related executed when the big win or the small win is won. Processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute is performed.

  If it is determined in step S4215 that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a hit related command has been received (S4217), and it has been determined that a hit related command has been received. (S4217: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S4218), and this process is terminated. The details of the win-related processing (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. As a result of the special symbol lottery, the effect corresponding to the big win game or the small win game executed when the big win or the small win is won. Processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute display is performed.

  If it is determined in step S4217 that a hit-related command has not been received (S4217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is determined. An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, a process for determining whether or not a status command is received is performed using either the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. The determination order may be defined so as to be executed prior to the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

  With this configuration, when the variation pattern command and the state command are output simultaneously from the main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 30) of the main controller 110. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32) is executed, a special diagram 1 variation pattern command is set, and then a state command indicating that the gaming state is changed is set. In addition, the gaming state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined prior to the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

  Therefore, for example, when the jackpot of Fig. 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot variation, the voice lamp control device 113 side sets the latent probability state. Thus, it is possible to easily set a variation effect corresponding to a variation pattern command that is a big hit variation in a state where it is determined that it has been performed.

  Unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed prior to the state command determination processing, the variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot variation described above is more likely to change. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received contents is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute a variation display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time that the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set in this way is delayed, the timing for notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be played is delayed, so that the player feels uncomfortable. The problem of giving will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 performs processing for changing the gaming state after determining whether or not the jackpot is successful and setting the variation pattern, whereas the sound lamp control device 113. On the side, a process for determining the current gaming state is executed first, and thereafter, a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the change display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

  Further, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110 on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202). This special figure 1 variation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the set gaming state. Accordingly, processing for setting a display mode (a variation pattern for main variation, a variation pattern for sub variation) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Then, the display control device 114 performs the third design based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) will be described below.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is set, first. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4301), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and a detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. S4303 ).

  Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the sub-status setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current gaming status is a latent probability status (S4304). If it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current state is not the latent probability state (normal state, probability variation state) (S4304: No), since the game state is mainly the variation display of the first special symbol, 1 A display command indicating the main variation pattern is set (S4305), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (the first special symbol of the first special symbol). Since the change display is a subordinate gaming state, a display command indicating the special figure 1 sub change pattern is set (S4306), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204). This special figure 2 variation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the set gaming state. Accordingly, processing for setting a display mode (a variation pattern for main variation, a variation pattern for sub variation) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Then, the display control device 114 performs the third design based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described below.

  First, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352), and a detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a ( S4353).

  Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the sub-status setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current gaming status is a latent probability status (S4354). If it is determined in the processing of S4354 that the current state is not the latent probability state (normal state, probability variation state) (S4354: No), the game state is in which the second special symbol variation display is subordinate. The display command indicating the secondary variation pattern shown in FIG. 2 is set (S4355), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4354 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (the variation display of the first special symbol). Is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating the special figure 2 main variation pattern is set (S4356), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are performed. While displaying the variation effect display corresponding to the variation display of (3rd symbol, variation display of the 4th symbol) simultaneously on the 3rd symbol display device 81, each special symbol (1st symbol) By changing the display mode (special symbol, second special symbol) display mode (size of display area and presence / absence of display as third symbol), the current status of change (lottery results and number of changes) can be changed. A special symbol type to be watched can be easily recognized by the player.

  Therefore, even when a game specification in which a plurality of special symbol types change (lottery) simultaneously (in parallel) is used, it is possible to suppress a game that is difficult for a player to understand.

  Next, stop type command reception processing (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, a stop type (big hit A to big hit D, small hit, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and the process ends.

  The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage each stop type and execute an appropriate change display. Can do.

  Next, the contents of the reserved ball number process (S4208) executed in the command determination process (S4151 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number processing (S4208). In the reserved ball number processing (S4208), processing for setting the display mode of the competition mode is executed when the gaming state is the latent state.

  When the reserved ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (holding ball number command) is extracted (S4501), The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is latent (S4503). If it is determined that it is not in a latent state (normal state or a state of probability change) (S4503: No), other processing related to the holding ball is executed (S4509), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is latent (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504). This right-handed flag 223j is set to ON in the jackpot related process (S5002) in the hit related process (S4218), and the holding ball of the first special symbol during the jackpot ending in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends. This is a flag for setting a dash mode that prompts the player to make a right-handed game when it is determined that there is a game. In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the right-handed flag 223j is not on (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4504, when it is determined that the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is 0 (S4505: Yes), the dash end flag 223q is set to on (S4506) because the timing is the dash mode end time (S4506), and the right-handed flag 223j Is set to OFF (S4507), other processing related to the holding ball is executed (S4508), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of first special symbol reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4505: No), other processing is executed (S4508), and this processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent state is reached, the player is informed that there is a holding ball in the first special symbol using the dash mode, but depending on the state of the first special symbol, Execution of the special figure 2 game may be displayed with more emphasis. Specifically, the display mode of the right-handed display may be changed according to the gaming state and the lottery result, such as when the first special symbol is not changing, changing out of play, or changing big hit. As a result, the player can be urged to understand the special figure 2 game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4212). This state command process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. The processing for setting the display mode displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 to be different is executed. Details of the status command process (S4212) will be described below.

  When the state command process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k is different from the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4601, when it is determined that the gaming state is changed (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

  In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state A setting command is set (S4603), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the sub-status setting area 223k (S4610), and this process is performed. finish.

  Here, when the processing set in S4603 and the command set in the processing in S4604 are notified to the display control device 114, the change effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to display various types of display modes (in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( Mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  By configuring in this way, for example, it becomes possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each gaming state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set gaming state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. The display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command alone. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of the display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received on the sound lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. When there is a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminating result is not proper, a simple display variation pattern command indicating proper information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are set. It is preferable that the display data is rewritten to simple display data.

  By configuring in this way, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received by the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change effect display having a content different from the actual game result (special symbol lottery result) from being executed, and the player's willingness to play to be reduced. The simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing a variation display of the fourth symbol. The display data having a smaller data amount than the display data used in the normal variation effect display may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. You may comprise so that it may do.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is It is determined whether the state is a latent state (S4605), and when it is determined that the gaming state is a latent state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the latent state) (S4605: Yes), the latent state is determined. The main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, the command for the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), the display command indicating the super mode is set (S4607), The process proceeds to S4610.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4605, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the latent state (not the command indicating the state command latent state received this time), that is, when the state command indicating the state of probability change is received. (S4605: No), a main display area setting command corresponding to the probability change state is set (S4608), a display command indicating the challenge mode is set (S4609), and the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S4610.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the change stop process (S4214), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop process (S4214). This variation stop process (S4214) sets a display mode when a variable stop related command (a command set when stopped according to the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main controller 110. The process for performing is performed.

  When the fluctuation stop process (S4214) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in a big hit in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S215 of FIG. 42) of the main controller 110. (See S1503 in FIG. 42).

  If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the special figure 1 change stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a latent state (super mode is being executed). If it is determined that the state is in the latent state (S4702: Yes), a display command for subordinate variation stop is set (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command for subordinate variation stop is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of place.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the state is not in the latent state (S4702: No), a change stop display command corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705. If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4705.

  Next, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop related command received this time is a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S4705). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed in a big hit in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 34) of the main controller 110. (See S806 in FIG. 34).

  In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a latent state (super mode is being executed). If it is determined that the latent state is established (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that the state is not in the latent state (S4706: No), a display command for subordinate variation stop is set (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 7A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a disconnection. If it is determined in step S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the process proceeds to step S4709.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the confirmation related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the confirmation related process (S4216). In this confirmation-related process (S4216), when the confirmation command for the first special symbol is received, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the dash mode, and a process to end the dash mode is executed.

  In the confirmation related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether or not the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command from the main control device 110, it determines whether or not it is the end timing of the dash mode. If it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751: Yes), a command indicating the end of the dash mode is set (S4752), the dash end flag 223q is set to off (S4753), and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S4751, when it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is not on (S4751: No), this process ends as it is.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4218). In this temporary stop related process (S4218), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the temporary stop command is received and the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the one fluctuation restart command is received. A process of setting (additional effect) is executed.

  When the temporary stop related process (S4218) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4801). If it is determined that it has been received (S4801: Yes), The stop flag 223m is set to ON (S4802). Then, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern currently set is calculated (S4803). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time calculated in the process of S4803 is less than 5 seconds (S4804). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than 5 seconds (S4804: Yes), the remaining variation time is stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p. Is set to indicate the remaining period A (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4809.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 5 seconds (5 seconds or more) (S4804: No), the remaining variation period is 5 seconds or more and is longer than 60 seconds. When it is determined that it is less than 5 seconds and less than 60 seconds (S4806: Yes), the remaining time information storage area 223p is set with a period B indicating a normal remaining variation time. The setting is made (S4807), and the process proceeds to S4809.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4806, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is longer than 60 seconds (S4806: No), a period C indicating that the remaining variation time is long is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p (S4808). , The process proceeds to S4809. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when special figure fluctuation is interrupted (subtraction of special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing when the special figure change is resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is changed corresponding to the variation time (remaining variation period) executed when the special figure variation is resumed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection ratio of each period information is such that the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period C. May be configured to vary depending on the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined intervals (for example, 30 seconds), and the periods A to C may be allocated in order to each of the divided periods. You may do it.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p and the remaining variation time. Can provide fun to predict time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4801 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4801: No), it is determined whether a special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809: Yes), the process of changing the target of the above-described processing of S4802 to S4808 from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is executed (S4810). The process proceeds to S4816) and S4817. After executing any of the processes of S4813, S4815, and S4816, or when it is determined in the process of S4809 that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has not been received (S4809: No), the restart process (S4817) is performed. Execute this to finish this process.

  Next, the contents of the restart process (S4817) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4817). This resumption process (S4817) executes a process for setting an effect to be executed when the special figure 1 resumption command is received.

  When the restart process (S4817) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is off (S4901: No). This process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), it is then determined whether a special figure 1 restart command has been received (S4902). If it is determined that a restart command has been received (S4902: Yes), then the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S4903), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read. (S4904) A variation pattern is determined from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4905), and a display restart variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S4906). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4907), and then the process proceeds to S4908. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4902 that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4908.

  In the process of S4908, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4908). If it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is off (S4908: No), this process ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4908 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), it is then determined whether a special figure 2 restart command is received (S4909). If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4909: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S4910), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read. (S4911) A variation pattern is determined from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4912), and a display restart variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S4913). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4914), and then this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is resumed after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends. A swing effect that swings and displays the 3rd symbol is executed in the period until it is performed, and when the special figure change is resumed, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (residual change period) after the restart is executed However, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an effect period discriminating unit that discriminates a normal effect period in which the normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating unit determines that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. Also good. By comprising in this way, since a normal production | presentation and an additional production | presentation can be performed continuously, the production | presentation display more suitable for a player can be provided. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure change period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the hit related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4220). In this winning association process (S4220), as a result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big win or the small win is won. The processing corresponding to the various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when the big win or the small win is won is executed.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. A process of setting a prize ball number command for display based on the result is executed.

  In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot related command (S5001: Yes), a jackpot related process is executed (S5002), and then this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot related process (S5002) which is one process in the hit related process (S4220 of FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related process, the third symbol display device 81 performs a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot related process (S5002), first, it is determined whether or not the hit related command received by the hit related process (S5001 in FIG. 69) is a jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5101 that a jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S5103). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S5104), and then this process ends. In this embodiment, since the information indicating the round number is transmitted as the round number command from the main controller 110, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control device 110, in the case of a configuration in which information indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5103 that a round number command has not been received (S5103: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that an ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the process proceeds to S5106.

  In the process of S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is smaller than 1 (that is, 0). If it is determined (Yes) (S5106: No), an ending command including RUSH is set (S5107), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106: Yes), the right-handed flag 223j is set to ON (S5108), and a dash is included. An ending command is set (S5109), and then this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot related command (S5003). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S5003: Yes), a small hit related process (S5004) is executed, and then this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, a description will be given of the small hit related process (S5004) which is one process in the hit related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. 71) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related processing (S5004). In the small hit related process, the third symbol display device 81 performs a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when winning the small hit. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit related process (S5004), first, it is determined whether or not the hit related command received by the hit related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) is a small hit start command (S5201). In the process of S5201, if it is determined that a small hitting start command has been received (S5201: Yes), a display small hitting start command is set (S5202), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the received command is not a small hitting start command (S5201: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S5203). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S5203: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5203: Yes), a display ending command is set (S5204), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the received command is not a small hit related command (S5003: No), it is then determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S5005). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5005: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S5005: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of a prize ball number counter (not shown) (S5006), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition is set (S5007), and then this process ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period until the normal state or the probability variation state is set in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) (advantageous continuation period) The prize ball number corresponding to the received prize ball number command is accumulated in the prize ball number counter. The winning ball number corresponding to the cumulative value of the winning ball number counter is displayed during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) or in the latent state.

  By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to know the total number of balls acquired during the period from when the latent state is set to when the normal state (probability change state) is set again (advantageous duration). Can be notified.

  In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous duration is displayed during the advantageous duration, but the player can be notified of the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous duration. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game and the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game may be displayed separately. In this case, the winning game state (big hit, small hit) at the time of receiving the winning ball command is determined based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223k, and the number of winning balls is accumulated for each determination result. Means should be provided. Thereby, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

  Further, the number of winning balls acquired in one advantageous game period (a period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) is accumulated and displayed. You may comprise as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the accumulated number of prize balls acquired within one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means as a history.

  In addition, as described above, when using a configuration that displays cumulatively the number of prize balls won during the advantageous duration, the number of times that the special symbol lottery result has become a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player. May be displayed, or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player (big hit, small hit) may be displayed.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period. Can be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured to continue unless the special symbol jackpot is won in the state where the latent state is set, and the small hit game is performed during the latent state. It is configured to be easy to break (the special drawing 2 lottery is easy to be executed). Therefore, the player plays a game with a sense of expectation during the advantageous continuation period in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period is set again, as well as the long-term non-winning state. Will do.

  In such a case, the player can grasp the actual game content (special drawing 2 lottery result) with respect to the jackpot winning probability and the small winning winning probability preset in the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to display various display modes. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many winning balls , And the actual small win winning probability is higher than the preset small win winning probability, so the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases and many prize balls are acquired. The case where it is possible can be analyzed so that the player can identify it. Therefore, by allowing the player to analyze the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the game and make it easier to continue playing the game.

  Further, when the game content (the special symbol lottery result) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for performing a condition achievement notification for indicating the fact may be provided. The condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of special symbol lotteries executed so far (so-called “Hamari”) exceeds a predetermined number (100 times), or between small wins. A condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of lotteries in FIG. 2) exceeds a predetermined number (10 times). In addition, a condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of prize balls acquired in one game pattern has exceeded a predetermined number (5000).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is performed based on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5305. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302).

  The fluctuation extracted from the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 60) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 of FIG. 59). Based on the variation pattern related to the production, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set (S5303), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5304). The process proceeds to the process of S5305 for setting the variable display regarding the 2 special symbols (special diagram 2).

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5303 is output to the display control apparatus 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 58) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control apparatus 113. The The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the gaming state.

  Next, the processing of S5305 to S5308 in FIG. 72 will be described. The processing of S5305 to S5308 is different from the processing of S5301 to S5304 in FIG. 72 described above in that the type of the special symbol to be processed is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Are the same. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  When the process of S5305 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5305). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not set to on (S5305: No), the process of S5309 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that it is set to ON (S5305: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF (S5306), and the second is based on the extracted fluctuation pattern command. A special symbol display variation pattern command is set (S5307), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S5308), and the processing proceeds to 5309.

  In the process of S5309, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S5309), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5309) : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S5309: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to OFF (S5310), and the extracted stop type Is set as it is (S5311), the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5312), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a win-winning win or a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player).

  Then, a special symbol type in which a lottery is easily executed according to the set gaming state is configured to be variable, and the second special symbol is set when a specific first gaming state (for example, a latent state) is set. In the first gaming state, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first gaming state is set again.

  Furthermore, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol is set similarly. However, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, in order to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being frequently executed in the normal state, a long time (10 minutes) is set. It is configured to be.

  However, in the gaming machine configured as described above, in the normal state, the efficiency of the second special symbol can be executed in spite of the low efficiency, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There was a problem of giving a lottery result that would be advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the state where the normal state is set, the second special symbol lottery is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped. Therefore, in the state where the normal state is set, the second special symbol is set so that it is difficult to win the jackpot.

  In the first embodiment described above, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the winning device during the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, so that the special game after the jackpot game ends. You may comprise so that the high probability state of a symbol may be set.

  In the present embodiment, three game states (normal state, latent probability state, and probability variation state) can be set as the gaming state. However, four game states that can be set (normal state, latent state) , A probability variation state, a short time state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), or two or less.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously, and the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to win a small hit is in a specific gaming state. Although it is configured so as to be easily executed in the (latent state), other configurations may be used. For example, the first entrance 64 is provided in the left region, and the electric accessory 640a is provided in the right region. A right-handed game is the most advantageous game for the player when the first entrance is provided and the second entrance 640 not provided with the electric accessory 640a is provided and the probability variation state is set. You may comprise.

  In such a configuration, during the normal state, the variation of the special figure 1 is set so that the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation of the special figure 2 as in the first embodiment described above, and the latent state is in progress. Is set so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation is shorter than that of the special figure 1 variation as in the first embodiment described above, and the electric accessory 640a is opened in the probability variation state and the short time state. It is good to set so that it may become easy.

  As a result, during the normal state, the left-handed game is used to win the game by winning the first special symbol, and during the short-time state, the right-handed game is performed more efficiently than during the normal state. In the probability-changing state, a right-handed game is performed with a higher probability than the normal state, and the first special symbol is drawn efficiently and the game aiming for the big hit is performed. During the state, the game aiming for a big hit or a small win can be performed by a right-handed game by a lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in the meantime. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 27 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or out of complete) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment as in the present embodiment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a command opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a use fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the change stop command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the change stop command process. This variation stop command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the sound lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main controller 110. A display stop command (display stop command) output from the sound lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the variation pattern (timing when the main control device 110 sets a stop command). Normal stop command) and various display commands set in the change stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the sound lamp control device 113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (determined) with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the other special symbol that is fluctuating is terminated with a predetermined variation pattern (variation time) Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to forcibly stop display with a symbol indicating a disconnection.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when the change of the special symbol is forcibly stopped from the main control device 110, a change stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70) is executed. , A display command (mandatory display) for variably displaying the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed) Stop command) is set.

  In the present embodiment, even if the normal stop command described above has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display based on the forced stop command received later is executed. In other words, the forced stop command is processed in preference to the normal stop command. Thereby, the 3rd design and the 4th design can be certainly displayed with the display mode corresponding to the control contents of main controller 110.

  In addition, the display variable stop command includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process (see S4214 in FIG. 65) of the sound lamp control device 113. The display command indicating the temporary stop When (display temporary stop command) is received, a data table in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is determined as the variable stop display data is determined.

  In the variation stop command process, first, the variation stop data table indicated by the display variation stop command is determined, and the determined variation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the variation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S6412 that there is no change stop command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is a display notification command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a command (S6416: Yes), a display notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the notification command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing notification command processing. This notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set in the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command.

  In the notification command process, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is read out. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display controller 114 also receives the related commands such as the light emission command other than the display command, the voice output command, and the accessory driving command. The related command may be output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in is added.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display notification command in the processing of S6416 (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81A, details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420). If (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6421) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the processing returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and thus a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set in the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 27) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, a parameter necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. To send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variation display is being executed, another variation display may not be executed. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as a structure which performs a variable display in an order from a holding ball in which a start winning is temporally old. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability of normal symbol) State), short-time state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) Yes. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

<Regarding Modification of First Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the latent state is set, it is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and when winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, By configuring the first special symbol that is changing to be forcibly stopped in a display mode that shows out of place, or to temporarily subtract the variation time (until the small hit game ends), the second special symbol Although it was configured so that the lottery is easily executed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the following configuration may be used.

  The jackpot probability of the special symbol is always constant regardless of the game state, and the first entrance that becomes the trigger for the variation of the first special symbol is placed at a position where the left-handed game ball can enter, and the right-hand hit The right first entrance corresponding to the first special symbol and the right second entrance corresponding to the second special symbol are arranged in the area where the played game balls can enter, and the right second entrance When the game ball passes through the through gate through which the right-handed game ball can pass, the mouth is electrically driven to make it easier to enter than the closed state by opening the game ball to the right second entrance. Arranges and configures an accessory.

  In the normal gaming state (low probability, non-electric support (ordinary symbol probability is low)), the game ball is inserted into the first entrance where left-handed gaming is performed and the first special symbol Play a lottery game. If the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, the probability of the normal symbol is high after the big jackpot game, and when the short game state (the game state with electric support) is likely to be in an open state, the game will be played to the right It is possible to play a game ball with the right first entrance and the right second entrance, and the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed simultaneously. Can be done. The second special symbol is set to have a higher probability of winning a small win than the first special symbol, and a small win game is executed in which the V winning device formed in the variable winning device with the V winning area opened. It is configured easily. Further, when the small hit B (the small hit A and the small hit B are set) is executed, the first special symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly terminated (forcibly set to the determination result of losing). Has been.

  Here, in the modification, the jackpot game executed when the game ball passes through the V winning area by the small hit game is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game executed by the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is set with jackpot. Here, the jackpot executed when the game ball passes through the V winning area is set such that the jackpot selection ratio in which the short-time gaming state is set after the jackpot game is higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. In addition, you may comprise so that the jackpot performed through a V winning area may become advantageous by setting so that the number of rounds may become larger than the jackpot of a 1st special symbol.

  In this way, even a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed gaming machine is advantageous to the player by forcibly stopping the big hit fluctuation which is disadvantageous to the player at one of the small hits or big hits and coming off. The jackpot can be easily given.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 100. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the type of gaming state set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 are as follows. It is different.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the winning jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot A that is won only in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is set to a promising state after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot B and jackpot C are set to a latent probability state after the jackpot game ends. Is done. The jackpot D that is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special chart 2) is configured such that a latent state is set after the jackpot game ends.

  Further, as described above, the first embodiment is a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel). ), And if the prize is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lottery of the first special symbol is discarded (forcibly stopped when released) or suspended (temporary stop) according to the type of the small bonus It is configured to do.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of the winning jackpot type, when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends. Further, when the big win of the first special symbol is won during the probability changing state, the latent probability state is set as the gaming state at the start of the change, and the small hit game (small hit RUSH) is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of a game flow in the case where a winning combination is won by lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the timing at which the jackpot fluctuation starts (see FIG. 88 (c)) and either The latent state is set in a period (symbol determination period) until the special symbol jackpot game is executed.

  In the state in which the latent state is set, a game for performing the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, if the winning of the special bonus 2 during the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is won, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted (temporarily stopped) during the period of the small hit game being executed, or , It is configured to be discarded (forced stop when it comes off). In addition, in the second embodiment, different variation times are easily set according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Therefore, depending on the selected variation pattern, there is a possibility that the big hit variation cannot be interrupted or discarded by the small hit of the second special symbol. As a result, the player desires to set a long period as the period during which the latent state is set, and thus desires to select a variation pattern having a long variation period.

  As shown with reference to FIG. 88, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is finished, a screen for notifying the player that the game state becomes a probability change state (challenge mode) at the time of jackpot ending is displayed. It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 88 (a)).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89 (a), the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of jackpot game is demonstrated. FIG. 89 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of a big hit game end screen (ending screen). As shown in FIG. 89 (a), in the jackpot game ending screen, a comment “Challenges mode entry !!” indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 displayed during a period in which the probability change state and the latent state are set is displayed. The character 811 is configured not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in a period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A gaming state that is advantageous to the game state (a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

  In addition, a comment “Aim for RUSH !!” for aiming at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a “left-handed” character is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. Thereby, when the probability variation state is set for the player, it is possible to easily grasp that the left game aiming at the left region is performed.

  In the small display area Dm1, “555” is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the big hit game currently being executed (ending screen display). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, “-” is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed. In the small display area Dm1a and the small display area Dm2a, “0” indicating that there is no reserved ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. In a state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 88 (b)), the gaming state is such that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed by left-handed gaming. That is, the probability variation state is a state in which the electric symbol 64a is easy to open because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easy to enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during this probability change state will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the display screen in the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), a comment “in the chance zone” indicating that the current gaming state is a probable change state is displayed in the sub display area Ds so as to scroll in the horizontal direction (from right to left). The

  In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Even at this time, the second special symbol is not changed from the state shown in FIG. 88 (b) (because the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). The non-variable display mode “-” is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a plurality of action display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probability variation state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol in the probability variation state (result of determination of success / failure) ), The action display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. Accordingly, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to predict whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol wins a big win in the probability variation state.

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. After the display screen shown in FIG. 89 (b) is displayed, when the variable display for indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is won is executed, the display shown in FIG. 90 (a) is performed. A screen is displayed. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variation display won in the jackpot is started in the probability variation state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game state is changed at the timing (see FIG. 88 (c)) at which the variable display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the jackpot is started. It is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state.

  Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous to the player (latency probability state) at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 of the display screen. In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the game is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 816 (the display mode of “333”) for indicating that the game state has shifted to the player is stopped and displayed. . Thereby, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state by the fact that the effect symbol 816 is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in this 2nd Embodiment, since the display aspect similar to the display aspect of the 3rd symbol is used as an effect symbol display aspect, the effect symbol display aspect stopped and displayed shows the lottery result of a special symbol It can be thought of as a display mode. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment “RUSH rushed in! Please hit right!” Is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the effect symbols displayed in the main display area Dm are stopped without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the variation of the first special symbol won in the jackpot. Since it is configured to display, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has shifted according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

  When the right hit game is continuously executed (during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol), when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 90 (b). As a result, an effect mode for indicating that the player has won the small hit is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the display screen in the latent state.

  According to FIG. 90 (b), in the state in which the latent state is set (during RUSH), if the small bonus is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small display area Dm1 is changing. “541” indicating a display mode for suggesting that the change of the 1 special symbol has been discarded (forced stop when it has come off) is displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates that it has won the small hit The display mode “246” is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm7, “V × 3” indicating the number of wins in the small win is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8, an elapsed time “01:50” since the latent state is set is displayed. Is done.

  Then, the treasure chest 817 displayed as an effect mode during RUSH is opened, and “V” for indicating a small hit is displayed as an effect symbol 818 for indicating a game result from the inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a small hit is won with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and that the small hit game is executed.

  In addition, an asterisk 819 is displayed around the effect symbol 818. This star 819 is a display mode that indicates that the big hit fluctuation that would win the big hit which is disadvantageous to the player is forcibly stopped by losing the big hit that is disadvantageous for the player. By configuring in this way, the player can obtain a sense of relief and can concentrate more on the right-handed game.

  In the second embodiment, the star 819 is displayed to show the variation result of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 818 may be displayed to be variable. Further, not only the variation result but also the remaining variation period of the discarded first special symbol may be displayed. With such a configuration, various effects can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in order to inform the player of the state of the first special symbol in an easy-to-understand state during the latent state, the contents of the effect are displayed in a variable manner depending on the state of the first special symbol being non-variable, out-of-line variation, jackpot variation, etc. May be. For example, the “right-handed” guidance display color in the small display area Dm3 may be changed or blinked. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

  In the second embodiment, the right second variable winning device 650 that is turned when the small win is won is provided in the right region, and the game method (right-handed) is the same as in the latent state. It is configured to play games. By configuring in this way, even if a small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability changing state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the big hit variation, In a state where the certain state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) can be efficiently performed.

  Therefore, at the same time when the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state), the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (FIG. 90 (a)). ))reference. However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol is also set in the state where the probability variation state is set. Both of the second special symbols may also fluctuate.

  In such a case, even if a display mode (see FIG. 90 (a)) indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 90 (a)), the second currently changing state is displayed. Until the special symbol fluctuates, the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state cannot be executed, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed indefinitely even in the RUSH state. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variation state), the variation state of the second special symbol (the variation Presence / absence, remaining fluctuation period), and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 91, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variation state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the effect when special figure 2) is fluctuating will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, when the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability changing state is set (see FIG. 88 (c)), the probability changing is performed. The “super challenge mode” is displayed in which the degree of expectation that the RUSH state is set is higher than the “challenge mode” for indicating the state.

  When “super challenge mode” is set, a comment for indicating “super challenge mode” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a manner moving at a higher speed than that in FIG. 89B, and the character 811 moving at a higher speed can easily find the treasure chest 816.

  The small display area Dm1 displays a “variation display mode” for indicating that the first special symbol is changing, and the small display area Dm2 is before the latent state is set. A “variation display mode” that has been fluctuating since the time point is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. The display screen of the “super challenge mode” shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed until the timing of the special figure 2 change executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probability changing state to the latent state, When the special figure 2 change is completed (see FIG. 88 (d)), a “RUSH” entry screen for notifying the player that the player has entered “RUSH” is displayed (see FIG. 91 (b)).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), the contents of the screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super challenge mode” will be described. FIG. 91B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super challenge mode”. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the main display area Dm, an effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure chest 817, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered “RUSH” is displayed. Then, “right-handed” for guiding the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a change display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (due to big jackpot change), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates a disconnection. The display mode “435” is stopped and displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. During a rush game (RUSH), that is, in the latent state, a game that frequently draws a second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is executed. .

  Therefore, during the rush game, it is configured to be able to win a small hit with a probability of 1/2, and to interrupt or discard the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the small hit game. However, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started, the variation pattern is different depending on the type of the jackpot, so if a short variation pattern is selected, the jackpot variation is discarded by the small hit Can not do it. This prevents the player from winning the unfavorable jackpot in the rush game, and can execute the rush game while wondering whether or not the most advantageous jackpot can be won.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 93. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. About another point, it is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation / latency probability table 202ad2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the probability variation / latency probability table 202ad2 is the same jackpot operation as the jackpot type defined in the probability variation / latency probability table 202d (see FIG. 14A) of the first embodiment described above. The contents are specified, and the setting contents of the hourly flag 203m and the probability variation flag 203g are specified for each jackpot type.

  The difference between the jackpot B and the jackpot C in the probability variation / latent probability table 202ad2 of the first embodiment described above is different in the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the jackpot B and jackpot C are configured such that the hourly flag 203m is set to OFF and the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends. In the second embodiment, the time reduction flag 203m is set to ON. In other words, in the second embodiment, when the probability variation state or the latent probability state is set, if the first special symbol jackpot is won, after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot game ends Probability change state is set.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the time reduction / accuracy changing table 202ae2 is longer than the time reduction / accuracy changing table 202e2 (see FIG. 17A) of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is different. Other than that, it is the same as the time / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, the lottery result of the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is “big hit A” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 159”. Is defined in association with a short fluctuation with a variation time of 0.1 seconds, a middle fluctuation with a variation time of 2 seconds is associated with a range of “160 to 196”, and varies within a range of “197 to 198”. A long fluctuation with a time of 600 seconds is defined in association with it.

  In the second embodiment, as described above, if the big win of the first special symbol is won during the probability changing state, the latent state is set as the gaming state and the right-handed game is executed. And if you win the “big hit A” in the probable change state, it is easy to select short fluctuation (0.1 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern, and even if you run the special figure 2 game in a hurry, the first is almost certainly Win a special design jackpot. Therefore, jackpot A is the jackpot that is most disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the lottery result is “big hit B”, and the variation type counter CS1 has a value of “0 to 4” and the variation time is 0.1 second. Short fluctuations are defined in association with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are defined in the range of “5-41”, and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds are in the range of “42-198”. It is stipulated.

  The jackpot B is configured so that middle fluctuation is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the latent state is set to 1 second regardless of the lottery result (see FIG. 17B). It is a jackpot that is easy to destroy.

  Next, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is “big hit C”, and the variation type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 1” with a variation time of 0.1 second. Short fluctuations are defined in association with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are defined in the range of “2 to 5”, and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds in the range of “6 to 198”. It is stipulated.

  As described above, when the jackpot C is won, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is easily executed as the fluctuation pattern. During a long fluctuation of 600 seconds, a 1-minute fluctuation of the second special symbol wins a small win with a probability of 1/2, so it is possible to reliably destroy this jackpot, and it is the easiest to discard It is a type.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the flow of the game of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a game flow showing the flow of the game of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that when the gaming state is a probable change state, when a big hit variation is started in the first special symbol lottery, the state shifts to a 100% latent state. To do. Since other game flows are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99, the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the control process executed in the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences. The second embodiment is largely different from the first embodiment described above in that the latent state can be set from the probability variation state as the gaming state at the start of the variation of the first special symbol.

  Here, the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231). This first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331) in contrast to the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 of FIG. 30) of the first embodiment described above. Is different from the point of executing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) and the game state update process (S332), and the other points are the same. The description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331). In this first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above is a jackpot. In this case, the processing is different in that the processing for setting the gaming state to the latent state is executed, and the other processing is the same.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), after obtaining the current lottery result in the process of S403 or S404, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is on (S451). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is on (S451: Yes), the symbol is removed from the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S451 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203n is not on (S451: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined that it is a big hit (S405: Yes), the above-described processing of S406 to S408 is executed, then the time flag 203m is set to off (S452), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the contents of the game state update process (S332), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process (S332). This game state update process (S332) executes a process of updating the game state at the start of the variation of the first special symbol and setting a command to be sent to the sound lamp control device.

  In the game state update process (S332), first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag 203m is on (S651). If it is determined that the time reduction flag 203m is on (S651: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction flag 203m is not on (S651: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S652). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S652: Yes), a state command indicating a latent probability state is set (S653), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S232) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S232). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S232) does not execute the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34). Is different in that the process (S809 to S811) for discarding is not executed. Since other than that is the same, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2551) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (S2551). The jackpot end process 2 (S2551) is selected as one of the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C when the gaming state is a latent state with respect to the jackpot end process (S2512) of the first embodiment described above. This is different in that the process of setting the probability variation state is executed. Since other than that is the same, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the jackpot end process 2 (S2551), after executing the above-described processes of S2701 to S2704, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state (S2751). If it is determined that the gaming state is a latent state (S2751: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is D (S2752). If the current jackpot type is the jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the time-short flag 203m is set to off in order to set the latent probability state in the gaming state (S2753), and the probability change flag 203g is set to on ( In step S2754, a command indicating a change in gaming state is set (S2709), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not D (S2752: No), in order to set the probability variation state in the gaming state, the time reduction flag 203m and the probability variation flag 203g are set to ON (S2706), as described above. The process of S2709 is executed, and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the same as the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences. The control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is a variation stop process (S4214 in FIG. 65) compared to the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that the variable stop process 2 (see S4251 in FIG. 100) is executed instead of (see). Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the fluctuation stop process 2 (S4251) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the fluctuation stop process 2 (S4251), when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received during the latent state in comparison with the fluctuation stop process (S4214) of the first embodiment, the display corresponding to the current lottery result is displayed. This is different in that a command setting process (S4751) is added. By comprising in this way, the lottery result of the 1st special symbol forcibly stopped to a player can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner. Since other than that is the same, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the second embodiment described above, the gaming state is a probable change state, and if the big win is won by the change of the first special symbol during the probable change state, the time is reduced at the start of the change (at the start of the big hit change). The latent state is set by setting the flag 203m to OFF, and the small hit RUSH for executing the small hit game is set until the variation of the first special symbol is completed.

  In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot is won and the latent state is set, the special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed. And by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, it is possible to temporarily stop the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, or to forcibly stop by losing, until winning the jackpot of the second special symbol Alternatively, the jackpot variation of the first special symbol cannot be discarded and the latent state is set until the variation stops.

  In addition to such a configuration, when a probability variation end condition and a latent probability end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of special figure 1, the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, the number of small hits execution, etc.) are set and the conditions are satisfied, You may comprise so that a latent state may be complete | finished and it may transfer to a normal state. Also, the end condition (for example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the latent end condition) is notified to the player, the player determines the game situation, and the special figure 2 game to the special figure 1 game (left-handed) It may be configured to switch to (game). With such a configuration, various game characteristics can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of gaming state set according to the special symbol lottery result, the configuration of the main controller 110, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the device 113 is different.

  In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it is comprised so that it may be won only by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, and a special symbol is displayed in the display mode which shows a small hit when it wins a specific small hit (small hit A). If the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped in a display mode that indicates a deviation and the other small hit (small hit B) is won, the change of the first special symbol that is changing The time subtraction was interrupted.

  When the latent state is set as the gaming state, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed, and by making frequent small wins during the latent state, It was configured to be able to give a prize ball. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is configured so that a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and it is easy to shift to the latent state after the big hit game is executed, and the upper limit is set for the number of times that the latent state is set. When the upper limit is reached, the normal state is set regardless of the winning jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, and one special symbol is won (one special symbol) When a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the symbol is a small hit), the change of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that the symbol has been removed. It is configured.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to forcibly remove the other special symbol fluctuation by any lottery drawing. In addition, since the big hit variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by the small bonus winning of the first special symbol, even if the big winning of the special symbol is won, the jackpot game can be prevented from being executed.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a specific gaming state (for example, a latent probability state) is set, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are both easily executed. However, when a specific gaming state is set, the control for forcibly stopping the one big hit variation by the other small hit winning is configured to be executed mutually. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from being ended by the jackpot winning, and to maintain the latent state for a long period of time.

  In addition, the third embodiment has a plurality of variation pattern tables that are referred to when setting the variation pattern of each special symbol, and the variation patterns defined in each variation pattern table are different. . Specifically, the length of the variation pattern (variation time) set when winning the jackpot is different from the length of the variation pattern (variation time) set when winning the jackpot.

  By configuring in this way, the probability that a jackpot game is actually executed can be varied even in a gaming state where the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery or the probability of winning a jackpot is the same. it can. For example, when a variation pattern table in which a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is easily set is referred to as a variation pattern set as a special symbol jackpot variation, a jackpot variation for 10 minutes is one special symbol variation. When executed, it is possible to execute many other special symbol lotteries during the special symbol change. Then, by winning the jackpot in the other special symbol lottery, the big hit variation of one special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that the special symbol jackpot game is difficult to play. Similarly, when a variation pattern table in which a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is easily set is referred to as a variation pattern set as a special symbol jackpot variation, it is executed during the special symbol variation. Therefore, the special symbol jackpot game is easily performed.

  In the third embodiment, the variation pattern set as the small hit variation of the special symbol can be selected from a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) in the same manner as the variation pattern set as the big hit variation described above. Thus, a big hit game can be easily performed by setting a short change time as a change time of the small hit change.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, it becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player who is likely to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, Once the latent state is set, the latent state is not terminated unless a special symbol jackpot game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in the latent state for a long period of time by winning a small win in each special symbol lottery and suppressing the execution of the big win game.

  In this way, use the gameability to continue the latent state advantageous to the player by forcibly stopping (disengaging) the big hit variation of one special symbol by the small win winning of the other special symbol Thus, since the game (game for drawing a special symbol that is not in the big hit variation) can be performed even during the big hit variation, the operation of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the display mode for indicating that the winning is won is displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the special is forcibly stopped by the hitting. It is configured to be able to execute a suggestion display capable of suggesting to the player the actual lottery result of symbol variation and the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation.

  Specifically, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it sets a variation pattern command for display to be transmitted to the display control device 114. A variation information storage means for temporarily storing variation information (lottery result of special symbol, variation time, etc.) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is provided, and then the special symbol during variation is forced When a command for forcibly detaching and stopping a special symbol that has been fluctuating based on a small win win (a variable stop command for small hits) is received out of the commands for stopping to stop automatically (variable stop command) Along with a display command for causing the display control device 114 to stop and display the special symbol being changed in a display mode forcibly indicating detachment, Based on the change information stored in the dynamic information storage unit sets a display command to suggest a stop variation information.

  When the display control device 114 receives a display command for suggesting stop variation information, for example, an effect display mode based on the actual lottery result of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped this time is displayed. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big hit, a monster character is displayed, and if the lottery result is a small win, a treasure box symbol is displayed. Further, the display is made so that the color of the monster character can be changed depending on the type of jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize how many times the end of the gaming state of the latent probability change can be avoided by making a small hit.

  In the present embodiment, in order to suggest the actual lottery information (lottery result, remaining variation time) of the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time also at the timing of displaying the display mode (“V symbol”) indicating the small win. However, the timing of the suggestion display is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which the small hit game is started, during the small hit game, or when the small hit game is ended. You may comprise so that it may carry out at a timing. In addition, it is possible to execute a fusion display in which a suggestion display and a display for indicating a small win winning combination are combined, or game information for indicating a small hit game result (for example, the number of winning balls or the state of latent probability) The number of small hit games executed in the middle) and the suggestion display may be merged.

  In addition, the above-described suggestion display may be set so that it is easier to execute when the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time has won the jackpot than when the jackpot has not been won. As a result, even if the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time has not been won, the player can be made to think that the player has won the jackpot at a good timing.

  In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when winning a small hit, there are a case where the special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped and a case where it is temporarily stopped. In this case, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the special symbol variation currently being executed is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped. It is preferable to set the display mode.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, only the first entrance 64b1 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81, and the right side of the third symbol display device 81 is on the right side. The first entrance 64b2 and the second entrance 640 are arranged, and on the downstream side thereof, the first variable winning device 65 that is opened in the big hit game and the small on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 A second variable winning device 650 that is opened in a win game is arranged.

  Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, a distribution channel is formed that can distribute and guide the game balls to the right first entrance 64b2 and the second entrance 640. The upper part of the distribution channel is fired right-handed (a game method in which a player launches a game ball with a launch intensity that allows the game ball to launch on the right side of the third symbol display device 81). A rotation distribution member 700 capable of alternately distributing the played game balls to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 is disposed.

  The rotary distribution member 700 is formed with a first receiving part and a second receiving part that can receive a game ball, respectively, and the first receiving part and the second receiving part are rotated by rotating the rotary distribution member 700. It is configured to alternately face the upper left part. The rotation distribution member 700 is configured to rotate by about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and is a right-handed game in a state where the first receiving portion is directed diagonally to the left (the state shown in FIG. 101). When the ball enters the first receiving portion, the rotation distribution member 700 rotates 90 degrees in the left direction due to the weight of the game ball, and distributes (guides) the game ball to the first flow path 701. When the game balls are distributed to the first flow path 7901 by the rotation distribution member 700, the rotation distribution member 700 stops with the second receiving portion directed obliquely upward to the left. Next, the game ball that has been hit to the right enters the second receiving portion, and the rotation distribution member 700 rotates rightward by the weight of the game ball that has entered the second flow path. The game balls in the second receiving unit are distributed to 702 (guided).

  In this way, the balls launched by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the rotary sorting member 700. The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 pass through the curved path 701a, pass through the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640, and flow out downward in the right region. In addition, the balls distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side thereof, flow into the inflow port 704a, and the back side of the first flow path 701 (in FIG. 101). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side (from the viewpoint) and flows out from the outflow port 704c to the lower side of the right side area on the game board 13.

  Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the rotary distribution member 700 merge below the right region, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65. It flows down to the outlet 66.

  Since the rotation distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, when 100 balls are fired per minute, the first flow It is distributed so that 50 pieces flow down to the path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds and 50 pieces flow down to the second flow path 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is constituted by a spherical passage formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) for one sphere, and the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced by a curved path 701a provided in the middle thereof. The sphere passage time until the sphere that has flowed into the first flow path 701 flows out of the first flow path 701 is about 2 seconds.

  In the third embodiment, the through gate 67 is disposed in the first flow path 701 and the second entrance 640 is disposed in the second flow path 702. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent a sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entrance 640.

  In the game board 13, a movable member 1500 is always provided along the ball rolling surface in the uppermost stream portion of the first flow path 701, and the movable member 1500 is moved to the open position (opened). In the state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first entrance 64b.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Yes. Specifically, in a movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is repeatedly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 1.2 seconds.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the first modification, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the rolling member in which the movable member 1500 is always provided is provided. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which this sphere flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the movable member 1500 at all times (or drops onto the movable member at all times) matches the timing at which the movable valve 1500 is always open. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first entrance 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or dropping on the constantly movable member) is an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is open is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is 1 second, the timing at which both match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about 4 balls enter the right first entrance 64b per minute.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a short-time game, a ball regularly enters the right first entrance 64b. It is possible to prevent a situation in which there is no suspension in FIG. In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim, the first left entry in the game state is normal. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

  More specifically, when a left-handed game is performed when the gaming state is the normal state, about 15 shots enter the left first entrance 64a out of the 250 shots launched. It is designed and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. In addition, it is designed so that approximately 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when the ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow about 20 balls to enter the left first entrance 64a in consideration of launching the prize ball to be paid out again when 250 balls are fired. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the game state is a normal state and a right-handed game is performed, about 9 shots are designed to enter the right first entrance 64b out of the 250 balls that have been fired. If a ball is entered, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the right region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, about 250 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b even if it is considered that the prize ball to be paid out is fired again when 250 balls are fired. I can only do that. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which a ball fired by a right-handed game passes. A general entrance 63 may be provided, which is based on a design concept such that the game is not advantageous to the player. Thereby, in the right-handed game during the short-time state or the big hit state, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out as a prize ball.

  Next, among the configurations disposed in the right region of the game board 13, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 will be described focusing on the differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. To do.

  A through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and a second entrance 640 is disposed downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). doing. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds can flow down toward the second entrance 640 without decreasing the flow down speed. Therefore, since the flow interval of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of spheres enter the second entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 is informed that the electric accessory 640a is opened without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball is quickly inserted into the second entrance 640. Can enter the ball.

  Also, different flow paths (first flow paths 701, 701) that are distributed by the sorting member 700 between the through gate 67, which is a trigger for executing the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol. When the sorting member 700 is broken so that the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths (when the sorting function is disabled) because it is disposed in the second flow path 702), the second entrance port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one flow path distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed, and a state in which a sphere flows down only in one flow path is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to cause.

  A case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outlet 704c is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 spheres are fired toward the right region in one minute, the sphere that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 are fired next to the sphere. The ball that has flowed into the ball flows down the lower right region of the game board 13 (region where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are provided) almost simultaneously (approximately 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once in a gaming state (a big hit state or a small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened.

  Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 so that a plurality of flow paths overlap in front view. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball passages (area where the ball passage occupies the game board 13). it can.

  Further, the ball outlet (outlet 704 c) of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second inlet 640), and the right side of the game board 13. In the lower region, the spheres are configured to flow out downstream from the spheres that have flowed out of the first flow path 701. As a result, the sphere that flows out of the outlet 704c vigorously (the sphere that flows out at a higher speed than the sphere that flows down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the sphere that flows out of the first flow path 701, and is irregular. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a sphere flow occurs.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which a ball fired by a right-handed game by the rotary distribution member 700 is alternately distributed to two flow paths. However, other configurations may be used, for example, 2 Instead of alternating (1: 1) with respect to the two flow paths, the spheres may be distributed at different ratios, or the spheres may be distributed with respect to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting member 700 is used in which the sorting destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passed ball. A split member may be used.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Only the differences from the first embodiment are illustrated and described, and the illustration and description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment in that a migration destination selection table 202ba is added, and the small hit random number table 202b is changed to the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. The second hit random number table 202c is changed to the second hit random number 3 table 202bc, the ordinary variation pattern table 202f is changed to the ordinary variation pattern 3 table 202bf, and the small hit type selection table 202g is changed to the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg. This is different from the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the latent-probable gaming state, the first special symbol lottery is also won. Specifically, if the acquired value of the first random number counter is in the range of “112 to 342”, the small hit counter is configured.

  Next, the second random number 3 table 202bc will be described with reference to FIG. Compared to the first embodiment, the third embodiment is configured such that even when a normal symbol has a low probability (normal state, latent state), the player wins a normal symbol. Specifically, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is “0 to 230”, it is configured to win a normal symbol.

  Next, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the latent-probable gaming state, the first special symbol lottery is also won. If the value of the small hit type counter is in the range of “0 to 49”, “small hit A” is set as the small hit type, and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, “small hit B” is set. Is done.

  And if you win a small bonus, just like the case where you win a small bonus with the second special symbol, depending on the type of small hit, temporarily stop or change the other special symbol forcibly stop It is configured as follows. Specifically, if the “small hit A” is won, the second special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, and if it is “small hit B”, the second special symbol is not changed. It is configured to forcibly stop.

  Next, the universal map variation pattern 3 table 202bf will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time is shortened even when the normal symbol has a low probability. Specifically, it is configured such that the fluctuation time is 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) when the normal symbol has a low probability. By comprising in this way, it becomes easy to fluctuate and the lottery opportunity of a normal symbol increases. Further, as described above, the third embodiment is configured so that it is easy to win a normal symbol even when the normal symbol has a low probability. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the right first entrance 64b2 even in the latent state.

  Next, the migration destination selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIGS. The transfer destination selection table 202ba is a type of change pattern selection table for selecting a change pattern to be determined after a small hit game when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won. It is a lottery table for determining the number of times of execution (the number of times of execution of a determination game (special symbol lottery) for selecting a fluctuation pattern from the transferred fluctuation pattern selection table).

  FIG. 105 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. A migration 1 table 202ba1 (see FIG. 107) and a migration 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) are set in the migration destination table 202ba, and the migration 1 table 202ba1 or migration 2 table determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba. 202ba2 is set.

  FIG. 106 shows details of the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. The game state is divided into a case where the game state is a latent probability state (non-electric support game state in the high probability game state) and a case where the game state is other than the latent probability game state (others). Is in a gaming state other than the latent gaming state, the transition destination table is not set, and the variation pattern is set from the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) set in the current state. ing.

  On the other hand, in the case of the latent game state, each of the transfer destination table based on the acquired value of the transfer counter 203ba, and the number of changes of the special symbol for selecting the change pattern from the transfer destination table (specified number after transfer), Are set respectively. Specifically, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is “0 to 90”, the migration 1 table 202ba1 is set (selected), and the post-migration specified number is set (selected) 10 times. . When the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba is “91 to 98”, the migration 1 table ba1 is set and the prescribed number after migration is set to 3 times. When the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba is “99”, the migration 2 table 202ba2 is set, and the prescribed number after migration is set to 100 times.

  In this way, only when the game is in the latent game state, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set as the variation pattern selection table 202e used after the small hit game when winning the small hit. Yes. By configuring in this way, it is not a left-handed game (a game method in which a player launches a game ball and plays a game with a firing strength at which the game ball flows down the left channel of the third symbol display device 81). Only in the latent game state, which is a game state in which a game is played by a game, a variation pattern can be determined using a specific variation pattern selection table for a specified number of times when a small hit game is reached.

  Here, in the normal gaming state (the gaming state without low probability electric support) and the probability variation gaming state (the gaming state with high probability electric support), 10 minutes is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. In addition, since the winning rate for the right first entrance 64b2 is configured to be lower than the case of left-handed, the player hits the left and enters the left first entrance 64b1. It is configured so that it is advantageous for a player to play a game by entering a ball. In the present embodiment, although not shown, the setting of the determination value of the second random number table 202c is changed, and “0 to 230” is determined as the determination value of the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. Is set, and “0 to 231” is set as a random number table per normal symbol for high probability, and the difference between the low probability and the high probability is reduced. In addition, the setting value of the general map fluctuation pattern table 202f is also changed, and both the general map low accuracy and the general map high accuracy are set to 500 ms. By configuring in this way, even in a gaming state with electric support (ordinary high-probability gaming state) as well as a non-electric support state (low-probability gaming state in general), electric The accessory is set to be easily opened, and the game ball is configured to enter the second entrance 640 more easily than the left first entrance 64b1.

  However, since the variation time of the second special symbol is remarkably increased in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the right-handed game ball can be configured to be disadvantageous for the player. The game can be played by a left-handed game. In the latent game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game by right-handing (see FIG. 17B). ). On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes as shown in FIG. 17B, and the lottery of the first special symbol is suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, in the latent game state, a right-handed game is possible (variable time is set to be short), and a lottery with the second special symbol is made, so that it is easy to win a small hit. In the small hit game, the 2R second variable winning device 650 is opened, so that it is possible to win the game ball to the second variable winning device 650, and the player is paid out for the winning ball. By this, the player's possession can be increased. Therefore, the longer the period of the latent game state is set, the greater the chance of winning a small hit (the number of wins) can be increased.

  Here, if the jackpot A in the first special symbol is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probabilistic gaming state (high probability, gaming state with electric support), so the left-handed gaming state It is configured to set a gaming state (a gaming state in which a small hit game is difficult to be executed) that is set and is more disadvantageous to the player than the latent certain gaming state.

  However, in the third embodiment, when the small hit is B, the lottery result is forcibly removed from the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is fluctuating, and the force is based on the stop of the special symbol indicating the small hit. It is configured to stop. Therefore, when the change display of the first special symbol based on (corresponding to) the lottery result that is a jackpot A is being executed, the second special symbol is small before the change time (variation period) elapses. By stopping the fluctuation of the lottery result that is a winning B, the fluctuation that becomes the big hit A in the first special symbol that is changing can be forcibly removed from the lottery result and displayed in a stopped state. It is possible to prevent the transition to the probability-changing gaming state, and it is possible to lengthen the period of the latent probability gaming state.

  Therefore, in the latent game state, the variation time that is a small hit in the second special symbol (only small hit B may be sufficient) is shorter than the variation time that is a big hit in the first special symbol (only big hit A may be sufficient) By making it easy to select, it is possible to obtain a game state advantageous to the player.

  Therefore, as will be described in detail later, when the transition 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) is determined, the variation time during which the determination result is a big hit in the first special symbol is a variation of 60 s with a probability of 99% selectivity. The variation time for which the time is determined and the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit is determined with a probability of selection rate of 95% for 1 s. Further, in the second special symbol, when the result of the determination is wrong, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Therefore, 120 fluctuations can be made after the first special symbol starts to change, and the probability of winning the second special symbol is 231/459 (see Fig. 103 (a)). Therefore, winning the jackpot B with a high probability (the probability that the jackpot B is selected is 1/2 in the winning the jackpot), stopped the second special symbol, and won the jackpot A The fluctuation of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as being off. In addition, since the prescribed number of times is set to 100 in the migration 2 table 202ba2, as shown in FIG. 106, the migration 2 table 202ba2 is kept until the total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times. It is fixed and set (the condition that the latent game state is set (if the latent game state has shifted to another game state, the variation pattern selection table (the first Is set as in the first embodiment)). It should be noted that even if a small hit is made during the period (within the specified number) in which the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table 202ba2 is set, the migration destination table is not changed and remains the same until the specified number of times elapses. The migration destination table is maintained and set.

  In this way, setting the transition 2 table 202ba2 increases the setting period of the latent game state, and during that time, it is possible to win a small hit, increasing the number of small wins is given to the player The number of prize balls can be increased.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to make a small hit with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the second special symbol is small as in the first embodiment. You may comprise so that it may hit. In addition, only the small hit B is configured to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the lottery result that is out of place, but not limited to that, the first special symbol (the first special symbol in the first special symbol) In the case of a small hit, the second special symbol) may be forcibly removed and stopped.

  Next, the migration 1 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 1 table 202ba1. The transition 1 table 202ba1 is stored in the transition information table by determining the transition 1 table 202ba1 as the transition destination table when the small hit is won by the transition destination selection table 202ba (see FIG. 106) (end timing of the small hit game). It is a table set in the area 203bc.

  In the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, a variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95% and a selection probability of 5% is 60 s. The variation time is determined. In addition, when the lottery result is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, when the lottery result is out of place, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is a big hit, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the variation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. It is configured to be. Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 90%, and the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 10%. It is configured. When the lottery result is out of place, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  Thus, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the first special symbol is a big hit, a short variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a high selection probability, and when the second special symbol is a big hit, Since the variation time of 1 s or 0.5 s is selected, it is difficult to forcibly stop the first special symbol from starting after the first special symbol starts to vary. Therefore, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the jackpot A is won in the first special symbol, it is difficult to forcibly stop the change, so the transition destination table (disadvantageous to the player) (Variation pattern selection table). Therefore, the migration destination selection table 202ba makes a disadvantageous setting for the player for the number of times (10 in the present embodiment) that the prescribed number of times after migration of the migration 1 table 202ba1 is large. In addition, the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set to 99/100 in the transition destination selection table 202ba, and in the latent game state, the latent game state is set to be long and the gambling ability becomes too high. It is comprised so that a malfunction can be suppressed.

  Next, the migration 2 table 202ba2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 2 table 202ba2. The migration 2 table 202ba2 is set in the migration information storage area 203bc when the migration 2 table 202ba2 is determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba.

  In the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit, a variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and a variation time of 60 s is determined with a selection probability of 99%. It is configured to be. Further, when the determination result is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. In addition, when the determination result is wrong, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, a variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and a variation time of 600 s with a selection probability of 99%. It is configured to be determined. Further, when the determination result is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the variation time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. In addition, when the result of the determination is wrong, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  As described above, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, the variation time selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit is determined as a long variation time (60 s) with a high probability, and the lottery result of the second special symbol The variation time selected when is a small hit is configured to select a short variation time (1 s) with high probability. Therefore, even if the change of the big hit B is started in the second special symbol after the change that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is started, the change of the first special symbol is stopped before the change of the first special symbol is stopped. The change of the 2 special symbols can be easily stopped, and the first special symbol in the change can be forcibly stopped by forcing the determination result to be out. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the big hit A, and it is possible to increase the number of executions of the small hit game and increase the number of prize balls for the player by extending the period set while the latent probability change is maintained.

  Further, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the variation time is set as short as 0.5 s, so the variation time (60 s) that is a big hit of the first special symbol Even after is executed, the fluctuation can be made 120 times until the fluctuation stops, and the lottery probability per unit is 231/459, so the first special symbol is fluctuated and stopped multiple times with a high probability. In the meantime, you can win a small win. Since the selection ratio of the small hit B is ½ of the winning small hits, the fluctuation of the small hit B can be easily stopped before the first special symbol fluctuation stops, and the execution of the big hit A is prevented. It is easy to do.

  Next, the special table will be described with reference to FIG. As the special table, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table ba2 is set, and the variation pattern for selecting the variation pattern in the latent game state in the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the specified number of times has elapsed. It is a kind of selection table.

  FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table. This special table is stored in the migration information storage area 203bc at the timing when the next variation pattern is selected after the variation of the defined number of times when the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table 202ba2 is set and the defined number of times has elapsed. Is set.

  In the special table, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and the variation time of 60 s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is configured. Further, when the determination result is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. In addition, when the determination result is wrong, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, a variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and a variation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is configured. Further, when the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 50%, and the variation time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 50%. Has been. Further, when the result of determining whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is determined, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  Thus, in the special table, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit than the transition 1 table 202ba1, the selection probability that the variation time of 60 s (seconds) is determined is set higher. The selection ratio in which the variation time of 1 s is determined as the variation time per small part in the special symbol is set low. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of removal in the second special symbol is set to 0.5 s, which is set shorter than the transition 1 table 202ba1. That is, the special table is configured to make it easier to forcibly stop the change of 60 s, which is the big hit A in the first special symbol, than the transition 1 table 202ba2 by stopping the change of the big special A in the second special symbol. It is composed of a table advantageous to the player and corresponds to setting a game state advantageous to the player by setting a special table.

  On the other hand, in the special table, by determining a long variation time of 30 s with a selection probability of 1/2 the small hit variation time, the variation (variation time 60 s) that becomes the big hit A in the first special symbol is started. Thus, it is configured so that one small hit variation can be executed at the maximum. As a result, the special table is configured not to be more advantageous than the migration 2 table 202ba2.

  In this way, when the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set and the specified number of times has elapsed, a special table that is in an advantageous gaming state is set until the next small hit and the transfer destination table is determined by lottery. It is configured. Thereby, the jackpot A is executed during the period from the lapse of the specified number of times until the next shift to the transfer destination table, thereby preventing the latent game state from being ended. Furthermore, since the transition 2 table 202ba2 that is the most advantageous game state for the player is set and the specified number of times has elapsed, a special table that is more advantageous to the player than the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a state in which the player's game motivation is enhanced, and to make the player interested in the type of the migration destination table to be set next.

  Normally, in a gaming machine, the player is most interested in winning balls that can be acquired in the jackpot game. However, according to the present embodiment, in the normal game state or the probability variation game state, the player is interested in the jackpot game. In the latent game state, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot game in the first special symbol will not be executed, and different expectations can be given depending on the game state. Can be.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a migration counter 203ba, a post-migration variation number counter 203bb, and a migration information storage area 203bc are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  The transfer counter 203ba is a counter for determining the transfer destination table and the specified number of times after transfer (specified number of times) from the transfer destination selection table 202ba. The transition counter 203ba is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and is a counter value that is updated in the process of S2411 in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. is there. When the power is turned on, the update is performed from the value that was backed up when the power was turned off, the RAM clear is executed, and when the backup area is initialized, the update is started from the initial value “0”. This transition counter 203ba is configured to be acquired based on winning of a small hit in the processing of S1172 in the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. ing. As for the special figure 1 deviation variation process 3, the second special symbol process in the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) is the first special symbol, and the first special symbol process is the first special symbol process. Since only two special symbols are replaced, illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The post-migration variation counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol has been changed (the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) executed after the migration destination table is set. . The post-migration variation counter 203bb is an initial value when the migration destination table is set in the processing of S1175 in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A certain “0” is set. In addition, in the processing of S1176 and S1199 in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071), after adding one by one, the value of the processing of S1177 is the specified number of times determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba. If it is determined that there is a specified number of times, a special table is set in the migration information storage area 203bc.

  In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process 3 (not shown), the process for the post-transition fluctuation frequency counter 203bb is executed as in the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process 3.

  The migration information storage area 203bc is a storage area in which a migration destination table determined from the migration destination selection table 202ba and a special table set when the specified number of migration destination tables has elapsed are set. When the information of the migration destination table is stored in this area, the variation pattern is controlled so as to be determined from the migration destination table of the type stored as the special symbol variation pattern selection table.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Third Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 112. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see FIG. 31: S306) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (not shown), compared to the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. In addition, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37: S908) is changed to the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), and the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (FIG. 38: S1009) is changed. It is different in that it is changed to process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3, the process for the first special symbol in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) is the second special symbol, and the process for the second special symbol is the first special. Since it is different only in that it is changed to a symbol, detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 111, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), first, data in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is acquired (S1001). It is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S1002). It is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability variation gaming state or the latent probability variation gaming state. If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203 is on, a lottery result is acquired based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability (S1003). Thereafter, the process of S1005 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1002 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (S1002: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (S1004). In the process of S1005, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processes of S1003 and S1004 is a big hit (S1005). When it is determined that the game is a big hit (S1005: Yes), the big hit flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to ON (S1006). The lottery result for the second special symbol is set as a jackpot (S1007).

  Based on the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1008). The value of the post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is reset to “0” (S1071). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S1005: No), the special figure 2 out-of-range fluctuation process is executed (S1009). After executing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009), this process is terminated. Note that the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 112. However, the process necessary for starting the variation of the special symbol when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of the way is described. Executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the special figure 2 off-variation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), which is one process in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) in the third embodiment. Processing will be described. In the special figure 2 deviation variation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), it is first determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S1101). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to ON (S1102). The lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). For the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol is set (S1104). It is determined whether either a migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or a special table is set (S1171). If it is determined that the migration destination table or special table is set (S1171: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the post-migration variation number counter 203bb (S1199), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1171 that either the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or special table is not set (S1171: No), the value of the migration counter 203ba is acquired. (S1172). Next, a migration destination table is set based on the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba (S1173). Then, a command indicating the set transfer destination table is set (S1174), the value of the post-transfer change frequency counter 203bb is set to 0 (S1175), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S1101: No), the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is incremented by 1 (S1176). Then, in the processing of S1176, it is determined whether or not the value of the added post-transition variation counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177). If the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177: Yes), a special table is set (S1178), a transition command is set (S1179), and the first symbol display device 37 displays the first. 2 A special symbol out of design is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

  In the processing of S1177, when it is determined that the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is not the prescribed number (S1177: No), the processing of S1178 to S1179 described above is skipped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The off symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described third embodiment will be described. When the number of changes of the special symbol (the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the high probability gaming state in the latent probability variation and probability variation gaming state is shifted to the low probability state. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, even when the destination table for forcibly stopping the execution of jackpot A is forcibly stopped, the gaming state can be varied, and the gambling ability becomes remarkably high. Defects can be suppressed.

  Further, as a further modification 2 of the third embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state, the transition destination table to be selected is set to be variable depending on the number of times the special symbol is changed. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate), the first special symbol jackpot variation is lengthened (for example, 300 s), and the second special symbol small hit variation is shortened (for example, , 0.5 s). It may be configured that a transition destination table that is more advantageous for the player is set by shortening the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol to 0.5 s. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the willingness to stop the big hit A forcibly by stopping by the small hit of the second special symbol in the latent probability change, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the first to third embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. The other pachinko machines 10, that is, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and the winnings that trigger each lottery are performed. Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes the lottery in the order in which the information is acquired (the order of the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the entrance to the second entrance 640) or one special symbol It may be configured to be used for a pachinko machine 10 of a type to be executed automatically.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time and one symbol is won in either symbol, the other symbol is displayed when the variation is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation is started. In addition, even if you win a small hit by the change of the other special symbol, depending on the type of the small hit, it is configured to discard or interrupt the change of the other special symbol, but start the change of the small hit It may be set sometimes.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described as an example of various effects to be executed. The player may use a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect notified to the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission effect which alert | reports to.

  In addition, as various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a notification effect that makes the player surely understand the contents and a suggestion effect that the player informs the contents more or less are used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (bonus probability) for winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a setting unit (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting unit is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

  In this case, for example, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value “1” is set, the jackpot probability is configured to be the highest, and the setting value “6” is set. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

  In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to vary according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

  Also, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning the jackpot is different, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, It is also possible to vary the variation time. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easy to select only when a specific set value is set is provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed It may be configured such that the currently set value is discriminated when the player pays attention.

  Further, a setting command for indicating the set value that has been set is set, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set value is executed based on the setting command received on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type (command for indicating the lottery result) output from the main control device 110 or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the variation time) may be used. When received, the setting value currently set may be determined from the content of the received command, and a setting suggestion effect based on the determination result may be executed. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the set value described above can be set in the pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. When using a simple configuration, various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the ease of variation (lottery) of each special symbol varies according to the set value set. If the specific gaming state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player is a predetermined setting value different from the specific setting value, the other special symbol lottery is different from the one special symbol. Various parameters may be defined for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easy to be executed, or a privilege (a bonus game content that is given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result) This is a concept including that a small hit game content and a game state set after the big hit game are advantageous to the player.

  Note that the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be set as appropriate without being limited to this. For example, the short time state for shifting from the normal gaming state may be only the short time state 2. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation of a player who has not been able to shift to the probable change state despite winning the jackpot in the normal game state.

  In addition, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution ratio are unified according to the type of special figure, but this is not restrictive, and the game state transition destination and transition distribution ratio are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game play, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored at an early stage.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, each of the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, different display means may be provided between the display means for displaying the main symbol highlighted in the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols in the third symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. It may be possible to use the operation means configured as a lever that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A discriminating touch sensor type operating means, a radio type operating means capable of discriminating an operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not on the main controller 110 but on the sound lamp controller 113 side.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in an effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. The main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a game (lottery) result are displayed as effects. The processing for this may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the number of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more special symbols are used. These special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols is determined and the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed independently have been described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as “setting”) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured to be able to change the setting at the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused may be used.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine having a multi-stage setting, any combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) is one of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). A typical example is one that can be set as follows, but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, it is implemented as a pachinko machine that can vary the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when the jackpot hits, according to the setting May be. That is, according to the setting, the rate at which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is varied, or the rate at which the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which a big jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is variable depending on the setting, or a big jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. It is good also as a structure which varies the advantageous degree for every setting by changing the ratio to change according to a setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot for which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot for which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0) is granted. The ratio at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot is over, the ratio at which the jackpot is determined to be shifted to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) (or easy to shift) is varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) ) May be varied in accordance with the setting. Alternatively, a jackpot type may be provided in which the ratio determined only with a specific setting is significantly high (almost not determined with other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as the setting 6. And in setting 6, when the jackpot is a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as a structure. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that it is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so let the player play the game paying attention to the number of jackpot rounds be able to. Instead of this, or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time-short state is completed. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, a jackpot type in which a jackpot (or an accessory in the jackpot) is activated with an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined with a specific setting (the ratio to be determined increases). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is varied according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probability variation state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is of a type that tends to increase the number of possessed balls as the number of lottery special symbols increases, especially in the probability variation state (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired). It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the probability variation state wins the next big win, and is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a high probability of small winning in the probability variation state, so that the advantage of high setting The sex can be increased. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probability variation state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big win is likely to increase. Therefore, in the probable state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group>
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a specific first determination result on the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing, a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege advantageous to a player, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination The second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means, and the second dynamic display means. A second dynamic display period determination capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; And a second privilege grant that can give a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. And the first dynamic display means based on the established condition during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A first control that forcibly sets the first determination result corresponding to the identification information to a value other than the specific first determination result; and a second control that interrupts the dynamic display of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine A1 having a switching means that can be executed by switching between control.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. Is provided to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball wins the starting winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first control forcing the display to be other than the specific first determination result according to the condition that the first identification information displayed dynamically is established, and the second control for interrupting the dynamic display Are switched and executed by the switching means, so that the content that the first identification information is dynamically displayed can be different from that at the start of the dynamic display according to the established condition, providing a variety of effects to the player Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A1, the switching unit is configured to grant the first type privilege in the second privilege in a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. As the first condition, the first control can be executed, and the second type privilege in the second privilege is given during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the second control can be executed with the second condition being the second condition.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the control in the dynamic display of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the privilege to be given can be switched, so that it is given to the player There is an effect that the privilege can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the switching means performs dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination as the specific first determination result as at least one of the conditions for establishing the first condition. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that it is required to be played.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first condition information is based on the fact that the first identification information based on the determination as the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. Since at least one of these is set, there is an effect that it is possible to restrict the granted privilege by suppressing the grant of the first privilege.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the first privilege is constituted by a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first privilege is set to be more advantageous than the second privilege, so that the first privilege is forcibly stopped. By being suppressed, there is an effect that the second privilege can be easily given by suppressing a problem that gambling is increased in a short time.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the game machine has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The means is capable of setting the first gaming state based on the fact that the first privilege is granted in a state where the second gaming state is set. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A4, since the grant of the first privilege is restricted by the execution of the first control, the first gaming state is given instead of the first privilege being granted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's interest is significantly lowered due to the transition from the second gaming state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, there is provided a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect for making the first condition easy to be satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the suggestion effect that makes the first condition easy to be executed is executed, so that the establishment of the first condition is achieved by executing the suggestion effect. Can be expected of the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Variation difficulty of jackpot fluctuation due to jackpot variable)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a specific first determination result on the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing, a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege advantageous to a player, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination The second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means, and the second dynamic display means. A second dynamic display period determination capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; And a second privilege grant that can give a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. In the gaming machine having the means, the dynamic display is performed based on the establishment of the first condition during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A first control unit capable of executing a first control forcing the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result; and varying a frequency of establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine B1 having a frequency variable means capable of

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. Is provided to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball wins the starting winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the frequency at which the first control is executed can be varied by the frequency varying means, the frequency at which the first privilege is granted can be varied, and the game becomes monotonous and game There is an effect that a problem that a person gets bored early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first condition can be established based on the fact that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The frequency variable means is configured to vary the establishment frequency by varying the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means. Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the establishment frequency can be varied by varying the second dynamic display period corresponding to the specific second determination result to be determined. There is an effect that the frequency can be varied by simple control.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a short dynamic display period group in which a short dynamic display period is easily set as the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means, and a long dynamic display period group A long dynamic display period group that is set so that the dynamic display period is easily selected, and at least one of the short dynamic display period group and the long dynamic display period group is set. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the establishment frequency is varied by setting one.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment frequency can be varied by switching the dynamic display period group, so by setting various dynamic display period groups, There is an effect that the establishment frequency can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic C group> (Advantageous period can be changed by winning a small hit)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a specific first determination result on the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing, a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege advantageous to a player, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination The second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means, and the second dynamic display means. A second dynamic display period determination capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; And a second privilege grant that can give a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In the period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, the first gaming state can be switched and set to the second gaming state, The gaming machine sets a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first privilege is granted, and the first identification information is displayed by the first dynamic display means. The first condition is met during the dynamic display period. A first control means capable of executing a first control forcing the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information displayed dynamically to be other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine C1 that is characterized by having.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. Is provided to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball wins the starting winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to avoid switching to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by executing the first control, so that the game is performed in anticipation that the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first condition is satisfied on the condition that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C2 that is configured so as to be capable of performing the above.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, by providing the second privilege, it is possible to avoid that the first privilege is granted and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is avoided. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of giving the second privilege, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second determination means is capable of determining a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, and based on the determination as the special second determination result. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a special benefit that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given to the player by the second determination, and thus the grant of the first privilege is restricted. Even so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that lowers the player's willingness to play.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first condition can be established even when the special privilege is granted.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the provision of the first privilege is also restricted when the special privilege is granted, which is disadvantageous for the player. There is an effect that the special interest can be given to the player and the interest of the game can be improved while restricting the setting of the game state.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the special privilege is granted, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed is interrupted until a release condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the special privilege is granted, the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted, so the special privilege is given. There is an effect that the user can be interested in the result of the first determination even after.

<Characteristic D group> (Aiming for an advantageous jackpot while the jackpot is changing (replay removal on ST machines))
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a specific first determination result on the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing, a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege advantageous to a player, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination The second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means, and the second dynamic display means. A second dynamic display period determination capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; And a second privilege grant that can give a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. When the second gaming state is set, the first gaming state is set based on the provision of the first privilege, and the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means A gaming machine D1 that is set by switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the number of times being the end number.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. Is provided to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball wins the starting winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine D1, there are a case where the game is switched to the first gaming state when the number of times of determination is the number of times of termination, and a case where the first gaming state is set by giving the first privilege. A variety of games can be played, and there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming state setting means, based on execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, A gaming machine D2 that is capable of setting the first gaming state after setting the state and finishing the dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the period of the second gaming state is determined by the dynamic display period of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result. There is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display period and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first identification displayed dynamically based on the establishment of the first condition during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine D3 comprising first control means capable of executing a first control forcing the first determination result corresponding to information to be other than the specific first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first condition can be compulsorily set to other than the specific first determination result. It is possible to prevent the transition to the gaming state, and there is an effect that the interest can be enhanced by raising expectations for the establishment of the first condition.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first condition is that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine D4 that is configured to be established on the condition of

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, since it is a requirement that the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the value for the second benefit. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature E group> (Remaining period effect C group effect of advantageous period)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a specific first determination result on the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing, a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege advantageous to a player, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination The second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means, and the second dynamic display means. A second dynamic display period determination capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; And a second privilege grant that can give a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. In the gaming machine having the means, the dynamic display is performed based on the establishment of the first condition during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First control means capable of executing a first control forcing the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result; and the first control result that is the specific first determination result A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests the remaining period of the first dynamic display period when one identification information is dynamically displayed. E1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. Is provided to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball wins the starting winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, the suggestion mode that suggests the remaining dynamic display period is displayed, and thus the first condition is satisfied. The player can recognize the period during which the grant of one privilege is restricted, can be interested in the timing of the first privilege being granted, and suppresses the problem that the player gets bored early in the game There is an effect that can be done.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a game state setting unit capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting unit includes the first game state. When the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set based on the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, when the first gaming state is set, the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the value can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition is that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E3 that is configured to be established.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition can be established on the condition that the second privilege is given. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Characteristic F group> (Announcement of the period when winning a small hit is advantageous)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a specific first determination result on the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing, a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege advantageous to a player, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination The second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means, and the second dynamic display means. A second dynamic display period determination capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; And a second privilege grant that can give a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it has privilege variable means for varying the privilege granted by the second privilege based on the timing of granting the second privilege.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. Is provided to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball wins the starting winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege granted by the second privilege is varied depending on the timing of granting the second privilege, the player can be interested in the timing when the second privilege is granted, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1, the dynamic display is performed based on the execution of the provision of the second privilege during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine comprising first control means capable of executing a first control forcing the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result. F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the first control can be performed to avoid the provision of the first privilege and the value of the second privilege can be increased. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first privilege granting unit grants one privilege type as the first privilege from a plurality of different privilege types, and is granted when the first control is executed. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it can notify the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the player can recognize the type of the first privilege that has not been granted by the suggestion information, and the effect that the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

<Characteristic G group> (Notify the discard contents)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; The first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determining means capable of executing the second determination The second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means, and the second dynamic display means. In a gaming machine having a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is When displayed, the privilege type to be given to the player is a number of different privilege types. The first condition is established during the period in which the first privilege information is dynamically displayed by the first privilege giving means capable of giving the first privilege corresponding to one privilege type and the first dynamic display means. A first control unit capable of executing a first control that forcibly sets the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information that is dynamically displayed to be other than the specific first determination result; When the first control is executed, suggestion information capable of suggesting information corresponding to the type of the first privilege that has been given if the specific first determination result is given by the first privilege granting unit. A gaming machine G1 having a notification means.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, various types of games can be made with different game interests by changing the state of the game by changing the type of start winning opening that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. Is provided to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball wins the starting winning opening is displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the player can recognize from the suggestion information about the type of the first privilege that has not been given due to the execution of the first control, improving the interest of the game, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first condition is satisfied on the condition that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine G2 that is configured to be possible.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, since the first condition can be established by giving the second privilege, there is an effect that the value of the second privilege can be increased.

  The gaming machine G1 or G2 has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the provision of the second privilege, and the effect execution means varies the effect based on the suggestion information. A gaming machine G3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the effect executed based on the second privilege being given is varied by the suggestion information, so the first privilege to be given and the grant It becomes possible to compare with the 2nd privilege to be done, and there exists an effect that an interest can be heightened.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (4)

First determination means capable of executing the first determination;
First dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means;
First dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means;
A first privilege granting means capable of giving a first privilege that is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific first determination result on the display means;
A second determination means capable of executing a second determination;
Second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means;
Second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means;
When the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, a second privilege granting means capable of giving a second benefit advantageous to the player;
In a gaming machine having a first gaming state and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The gaming state setting means includes
If the second gaming state is set, the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the first privilege is granted,
A gaming machine that is set by switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the fact that the number of times of determination by the first determining means or the second determining means is an end number. .   The gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on execution of dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result when a predetermined condition is established, 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first gaming state can be set after the dynamic display of the first identification information is completed.   The first corresponding to the first identification information that is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first condition during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a first control unit capable of executing a first control that forcibly makes a determination result other than the specific first determination result.   The first condition can be established on the condition that the second privilege is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

Images